1

2018 JOHNSON COUNTY 4-H FAIR BOOK TABLE OF CONTENTS

2 GENERAL RULES 25 COMMUNICATION & EXPRESSIVE ARTS 5 GENERAL ANIMAL RULES & REQUIREMENTS 25 Contests (Speech, PSA, Present., Theater, Music) 8 General Animal Showmanship Rules 27 Communications 8 HERDSMANSHIP 28 Photography 9 BEEF CATTLE 29 CONSUMER & FAMILY SCIENCE 9 Beef Cattle Showmanship 29 Fashion Show 10 Market Beef 31 Heritage 10 Breeding Beef 31 Human Development 11 Feeder Calf 32 Clothing & Fiber Arts 11 Rate of Gain 35 Knitting & Crochet 11 Fitting Contest 35 Consumer Management (ex. Shopping in Style,

etc.) 12 BUCKET CALF 37 Entrepreneurship 12 DAIRY CATTLE 38 Home Environment 12 Dairy Cattle Showmanship 40 Quilt Quest 12 GOATS 41 ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION & EARTH SCI. 13 Goat Showmanship 41 Wildlife Contest 13 Dairy Goat 41 Conservation & Wildlife 13 Pet Goat 43 Shooting Sports 14 Market Meat Goat 44 Entomology 14 Breeding Meat Goat 45 Forestry 14 Best Dressed Goat 47 HEALTHY LIFESTYLES EDUCATION 14 HORSES 47 Favorite Food Revue 15 Horse Showmanship 47 Foods 15 Halter Classes 51 Safety & Physical Education 16 Performance/Pleasure Classes 53 LEADERSHIP & CITIZENSHIP 16 Mini Pleasure Driving 53 Citizenship 16 Speed Classes 53 Leadership 16 POULTRY 54 PLANT SCIENCE 17 Poultry Showmanship 54 Horticulture Contest 17 Chickens 54 Agronomy (crops, weeds & range) 17 Waterfowl & Turkeys 56 Horticulture 17 Production Pen of Three & Trios 60 SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 18 Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project 60 Aerospace 18 RABBITS 61 Computers 19 Rabbit Showmanship 62 Electricity 19 Market Rabbit 62 Lego Building 19 Breeding Rabbit 63 Robotics 19 SHEEP 63 Geospatial 20 Sheep Showmanship 64 Wind Energy 20 Market Lamb 64 Woodworking 20 Breeding Ewe 65 Welding 20 SWINE 66 ATV & Small Engine 21 Swine Showmanship 66 Veterinary Science 21 Market Swine 66 PROJECT FLOP 21 COMPANION ANIMALS 67 CLOVER KIDS 21 Caged Pets & Birds 69 2018 Johnson County Fair Schedule 22 Cats 22 Dogs 24 ANIMAL SCIENCE

2

GENERAL RULES The following rules apply to all departments of the 4-H Section of the County Fair. Rules, which apply specifically to a particular department, will be listed under rules for that department. In the case the general rules conflict with department rules the department rules govern. 1. ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR EXHIBITORS - An exhibitor must be a 4-H member enrolled in the project he/she is exhibiting in the county in

which he/she represents. Exhibitors must be enrolled by May 1 in the project in which they wish to exhibit. There will be no discrimination because of race, color, sex, national or ethnic origin, religion, age, handicapped, marital status or sexual orientation. A 4-H member must be 8 to 18 years of age inclusive on December 31st of the preceding year. The last year of eligibility is the calendar year the member becomes 19. The Johnson County 4-H Council maintains the authority to establish age limits for exhibitors outside of those stated above for youth with special needs/disabilities. STATE FAIR – In classes where the presence of the 4-H member is required for judging purposes, such as animal exhibits, judging contests, communications events, and fashion show, a 4-H member must be 10 by December 31st of the preceding year or turn 11 during the current year. The last year of eligibility is the calendar year the member becomes 19. For classes where presence of the 4-H member is not required, the exhibitor must be 8 as of December 31st of the preceding year or turn 9 during the current year. CLOVER KIDS – Clover Kid exhibitors must be enrolled by May 1 in the Clover Kid program. A Clover Kid member must be 5 to 7 years of age inclusive as of December 31st of the preceding year.

2. CROSS COUNTY AND CROSS STATE LINE PARTICIPATION – A member cannot enroll in the same 4-H project area in more than one county or state in the same year. (Example: beef [bucket calf, feeder calf, market beef, and breeding beef are among those listed within the beef project area], clothing, foods, etc.). Exception: Youth may enroll in shooting sports projects in more than one county Enrollments should occur by discipline (i.e. shotgun, BB gun) based on the availability of certified instructors. Youth many not be enrolled in the same discipline in more than one county or state.

3. PROCEDURE FOR MAKING ENTRIES - All 4-H entries, pre-entries, and identification affidavits must be made on the appropriate forms provided by the Extension Office and submitted by closing on the Deadline designated by the Extension Office (see below). *If the deadline date falls on a weekend the deadline will be moved to the Monday immediately following the determined deadline date.

Deadline* Deadline* April 1 4-H Market Beef Ownership Affidavits July 15 Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form May 1 ALL 4-H Member and Volunteer Enrollments July 15 Johnson County Fair Horse Entry Form (Including Clover Kids) July 15 Johnson County Dog Show Entries May 1 4-H Horse Ownership Affidavits July 15 Johnson County Clover Kid Pet Show Entries May 1 4-H Companion Animal Identification Affidavit June 1 Companion Animal Show Entries June 15 All 4-H Livestock Ownership Affidavits Rabbit Identification Affidavit Market Goat Identification Affidavit Breeding Heifer, Ewe & Doe Ownership Affidavit Market Lamb Ownership Affidavit Market Swine Ownership Affidavit Feeder Calf/Bucket Calf Ownership Affidavit Dairy Identification Affidavit Dairy Goat Identification Affidavit Poultry Ownership Affidavit

3. ENTRY SHEETS – Exhibitors wanting to exhibit beef, bucket calf, dairy cattle, goats (meat & dairy/pet), poultry, sheep, and/or swine at the Johnson County Fair must complete and submit the Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form. Exhibitors wanting to exhibit in the horse project must complete and submit the Johnson County Fair Horse Entry Form.

4. ENTRY DEADLINES ANIMALS - All large and small animal, and horse project exhibits for the County Fair must be entered on the appropriate Johnson County Fair Entry Form and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on JULY 15 (if July 15 falls on a weekend, entries will be due to the Extension Office on the Monday immediately following July 15). FAMILY AND CONSUMER SCIENCE

PRESENCE REQUIRED • 4-H Fashion Show: Participants must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry forms and submitting them to the Johnson County

Extension Office by closing on the date designed by the Extension Office. • Favorite Food Revue: Participants must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County

Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. PRESENCE NOT REQUIRED

• Exhibits where presence of the 4-H member is not required (i.e. County Fair static exhibit entries); DO NOT need to be pre-entered prior to the designated entry day. Exhibits will be entered on the appropriate entry day (see below).

Areas Entry Day • Foods and Nutrition (not including Clover Kid food

entries) Saturday prior to the Johnson County Fair

• All other FCS static exhibit areas Tuesday prior to the Johnson County Fair Entry tags must be completed prior to entering exhibits; tags not completely filled out will not be accepted. Additionally, exhibitors must complete a Johnson County Static Exhibit Summary Sheet and submit it when entering exhibits. Entry tags are available at the Johnson County Extension Office. GENERAL AREAS

PRESENCE REQUIRED • Communications Contest: Participants must pre-enter for the Public Speaking, PSA, and Presentations Contests by completing the

appropriate entry forms and submitting them to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office.

• Music Contest: Participants must pre-enter for the Music Contest by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office.

• Theater Arts Contest: Participants must pre-enter for the Theater Arts Contest by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office.

PRESENCE NOT REQUIRED • Exhibits where presence of the 4-H member is not required (i.e. County Fair static exhibit entries); DO NOT need to be pre-entered prior to the

designated entry day. Exhibits will be entered on the general static exhibit entry day (Tuesday prior to the opening of the Johnson County

3

Fair). Entry tags must be completed prior to entering exhibits; tags not completely filled out will not be accepted. Additionally, exhibitors must complete a Johnson County Static Exhibit Summary Sheet and submit it when entering exhibits. Entry tags are available at the Johnson County Extension Office.

5. IDENTIFICATION SHEETS - 4-H Horse Ownership Affidavits must be completed and returned to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1 (if May 1 falls on a Saturday or Sunday entries will be due to the Extension Office on the Monday immediately following). 4-H Market Beef Ownership Affidavits must be completed and submitted to Johnson County Extension Staff on the designated county market beef weigh in day (the date will be determined by the Johnson County Extension Staff and 4-H Council). All other large and small animal ownership affidavits (breeding beef, feeder/bucket calf, dairy cattle and goat, breeding & market meat goats, breeding & market sheep, poultry, and market swine) must be completed and returned to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on June 15 (if June 15 falls on a Saturday or Sunday the deadline will be moved to the Monday immediately following).

6. ENTRY FEES – There are no entry fees for 4-H exhibits in the Johnson County Fair. 7. NUMBER OF ENTRIES – 4-H members may exhibit one (1) entry per class unless otherwise noted. No entry can compete in more than one

class. 8. PROJECT ENROLLMENT – Entries are allowed in only one unit/level of competition. Those exhibiting in a Middle or Advanced unit may not

exhibit in a less advanced unit. 9. PROJECT ELIGIBILITY - Items entered for competition in previous years are not eligible for competition again unless otherwise noted.

Additionally, items completed for another organization and/or school are not eligible for competition. 10. COUNTY ONLY CLASSES – Static exhibit classes that are listed in the 900s are county only classes and projects ARE NOT eligible to be

chosen as State Fair exhibits. 11. SUPPORTING INFORMATION FOR EXHIBITS - Exhibits may require supporting information, check the appropriate Fair Book section to

determine what additional information may be required. Exhibits lacking the required supporting information will be lowered a ribbon placing. 12. SCORING – Score sheets for 4-H static exhibit entries may be found on the web and are also available in the Johnson County Extension

Office. 13. EXHIBIT RELEASE – The release times for the Johnson County Fair will be listed on the schedule. No exhibitor is allowed to remove any

exhibit (static or live) on exhibition until the scheduled time without the permission of the area and/or overall superintendent and the permission of Johnson County Extension staff and/or Johnson County 4-H Council President and/or licensed veterinarian. Additionally, in order to remove animal(s) before the scheduled release time a Johnson County Fair Animal Release Form must be completed for each animal to be removed.

14. PROTEST COMMITTEE A. The superintendents of each division at the County Fair have the authority to make the appropriate decisions based on the rules and

regulations of the County Fair. B. Designated members of the Johnson County 4-H Council and Johnson County Fair Board will serve as the Protest and Appeals

committee. They will meet when needed to act upon any protest or appeals. C. All protests must be submitted in writing and signed. Written protests and appeals must be submitted to the Johnson County Extension

Staff. The staff person will convene the committee for their deliberation. D. Written protests must include the following:

• Names of persons involved • Nature of concern • Situation and documentation • Recommendations for correction • Specific action, rule, etc. in question • Additional persons committee may contact for further clarification • Procedures and/or steps carried out by person involved prior to submission of the protest to the Extension Staff person

E. The committee will review the written protest. They may discuss the situation with anyone they feel has knowledge of the situation. The committee’s recommendation or decision will be communicated both verbally and in writing to the group or individuals affected. The committee will recommend appropriate action to the Extension Staff in writing prior to communicating with the affected group or individual.

F. In cases of protest, the exhibitor may be allowed to show pending the results of the committee’s decision. Results of this showing may be subject to change based on outcome of the protest process.

G. The show management reserves the right to withhold premiums and/or awards. The exhibitor may be excluded from the show and/or 4-H Premium Sale if action warrants.

H. The appeals process is limited to the 4-H exhibitor, parent and/or volunteer leader. Protests will not be accepted after the exhibit is released from the County Fair. Protests related to judges’ integrity, decisions, placing and/or other evaluations will not be accepted.

15. DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY AT COUNTY FAIR • EXHIBITS – 4-H exhibits at the Johnson County Fair are entered and displayed at the risk of the 4-H member. The University of

Nebraska – Lincoln Extension 4-H Youth Development, in cooperation with the Johnson County Fair Board cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage that may occur to exhibits or exhibitors.

• PATRONS/PARTICIPANTS – While the greatest possible care will be exercised by the Johnson County Fair Board to protect patrons/participants of the Johnson County Fair, each individual will be held personally responsible for any injury, accident and/or loss.

16. INSURANCE – Accident insurance is carried on all currently enrolled 4-H members and volunteers in the Johnson County 4-H program. A report of all accidents must be made to the Johnson County Extension Office within 24 hours of the accident. Your claim must be filed with the Extension Office within 10 days after the accident.

17. RIBBONS AND PREMIUMS AWARDED – 4-H exhibits will be judged according to research-based standards that indicate level of performance or quality of work. • Purple ribbons designate an exhibit of superior quality that has met and exceeded all of the standards. • Blue ribbons denote an above average exhibit that has met almost all of the standards in a way that surpasses the norm. • Red ribbons indicate average quality and indicate that the exhibit has met the majority of standards in such as way that the benchmark

was reached, but not exceeded. • White ribbons indicate that the exhibit has not met the majority of the standards. Entries incorrectly entered may receive a participation ribbon to recognize the exhibit’s presence at the County Fair. Clover Kid exhibits will receive a rainbow ribbon to denote participation. LIVESTOCK, POULTRY & HORSES – Exhibits must be purple quality to be named Champion or Reserve Champion and/or qualify for related special awards. Special awards include trophies, plaques, medals, medallions, etc. Purple and lavender rosettes are not considered to be special awards and will only be awarded to purple merit exhibits.

4

STATIC EXHIBITS – Exhibits must be purple quality to be named a Top Exhibit and/or qualify for related special awards. PRE-FAIR CONTESTS – Participants must receive a purple ribbon to be named Champion or Reserve Champion and/or qualify for related special awards. Special awards include trophies, plaques, medals, medallions, etc.

18. FORFEIT OF PREMIUM – Exhibitors will forfeit their premium money under the following situations if not previously approved by the Johnson County 4-H Council: • Incorrect animal identification (i.e. wrong ear tags or new ear tags nor reported to the Extension Office) • Failure to submit the appropriate animal identification affidavits to the Extension Office by the deadline indicated. • Failure to complete an early animal release form • Not meeting the dress code for a specific event

19. DROP ONE RIBBON PLACING - Exhibitors will be dropped in ribbon placing under the following situations unless otherwise noted: • For entering an incomplete project (i.e. those lacking the required supporting information, etc.) • For entering a complete project that does not follow the specified dimensions, requirements, etc. for the project (i.e. display board too

large, etc.) • For failure to abide by the livestock grooming rules (i.e. someone other than the 4-H member or their parent(s) is grooming their animal).

20. STATE FAIR ENTRY ELIGIBILITY – In order to be eligible to exhibit at the Nebraska State Fair a 4-H member must be enrolled in the county they are representing by June 15. • STATIC EXHIBITS – In order to be selected to exhibit at the Nebraska State Fair an exhibit must receive a purple ribbon at the county

level. • LARGE & SMALL ANIMAL EXHIBITS – In order to exhibit at the Nebraska State Fair exhibitors must complete the appropriate entry

forms. Exhibitors wanting to take market beef, feeder calves, lambs, meat goats, or swine must submit DNA samples. Exhibitors wanting to exhibit at the State Fair must complete and submit the appropriate entry forms online by the date specified by the Nebraska State 4-H Office. Additionally, exhibitors must pay in full when submitting their entries. (If you have any questions regarding entering State Fair Exhibits please contact the Johnson County Extension Office).

21. VIOLATION OF RULES - Exhibitors are subject to loss of premium monies, ribbons, other awards and/or dismissal from exhibiting: • No person except the judges on duty, ring assistants, and exhibitors will be allowed inside the arena during the judging of entries. • No person shall be allowed to interfere with a judge. Any exhibitor who does so will be dismissed from competition. • If the Johnson County Fair Board is provided with satisfactory information that a premium has been obtained by fraud, then such

premium shall be withheld. • Use or possession of tobacco, alcoholic beverages, and/or controlled substances (except for approved medical purposes) by any 4-H

exhibitor participating in the Johnson County Fair will result in immediate disqualification of that exhibitor’s entry(s). 22. DISQUALIFICATIONS/JUDGING - Area superintendents have the authority to determine eligibility/ineligibility of an exhibit entry into their

division. All ineligible items will not be judged or displayed.

5

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF FAIRS AND EXPOSITIONS (IAFE) NATIONAL CODE OF SHOW RING ETHICS

Exhibitors of animals at livestock shows shall at all times deport (conduct) themselves with honesty and good sportsmanship. Their conduct in this competitive environment shall always reflect the highest standards of honor and dignity to promote the advancement of agricultural education. This code applies to junior as well as open class exhibitors who compete in structured classes of competition. This code applies to all livestock offered in any event at a livestock show. In addition to the “IAFE National Code of Show Ring Ethics,” fairs and livestock shows may have rules and regulations which they impose on the local, county, state, provincial and national levels.

All youth leaders working with junior exhibitors are under an affirmative responsibility to do more than avoid improper conduct or questionable acts. Their moral values must be so certain and positive that those younger and more pliable will be influenced by their fine example. Owners, exhibitors, fitters, trainers and absolutely responsible persons who violate the code of ethics will forfeit premiums, awards and auction proceeds and shall be prohibited from future exhibition in accordance with the rules adopted by the respective fairs and livestock shows. Exhibitors who violate this code of ethics demean the integrity of all livestock exhibitors and should be prohibited from competition at all livestock shows in the United States and Canada.

The following is a list of guidelines for all exhibitors and all livestock in competitive events: 1. All exhibitors must be present, upon request of fair and livestock show officials, proof of ownership, length

of ownership and age of all animals entered. Misrepresentation of ownership, age or any facts relating thereto is prohibited. 2. Owners, exhibitors, fitters, trainers or absolutely responsible persons shall provide animal health

certificates from licensed veterinarians upon request by fair or livestock show officials. (Health Certificates are not required for the Johnson County Fair).

3. Junior exhibitors are expected to care for and groom their animals while at fairs or livestock shows. 4. Animals shall be presented to show events where they will enter the food chain free of volatile drug

residues. The act of entering an animal in a livestock show is the giving of consent by the owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer and/or absolutely responsible person for show management to obtain any specimens of urine, saliva, blood or other substances from the animal to be used in testing. Animals not entered in an event which culminates with the animal entering the food chain shall not be administered drugs other than in accordance with applicable federal, state and provincial statutes, regulations and rules. Livestock shall not be exhibited if the drugs administered in accordance with federal, state and provincial statutes, regulations and rules affect the animal's performance or appearance at the event. If the laboratory report on the analysis of saliva, urine, blood or other sample taken from livestock indicates the presence of forbidden drugs or medication, this shall be prima facie evidence such substance has been administered to the animal either internally or externally. It is presumed that the sample of urine, salvia, blood or other substance tested by the laboratory to which it is sent is the one taken from the animal in question, its integrity is preserved and all procedures of said collection and preservation, transfer to the laboratory and analysis of the sample are correct and accurate and the report received from the laboratory pertains to the sample taken from the animal in question and correctly reflects the condition of the animal at the time the sample was taken, with the burden on the owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer or absolutely responsible person to prove otherwise. At any time after an animal arrives on the fair or livestock show premises, all treatments involving the use of drugs and/or medications for the sole purpose of protecting the health of the animal shall be administered by a licensed veterinarian.

5. Any surgical procedure or injection of any foreign substance or drug or the external application of any substance (irritant, counterirritant or similar substance) which could affect the animal's performance or alter its natural contour, confirmation or appearance, except external applications of substances to the hoofs or horns of animals which affect appearance only and except for surgical procedures performed by a duly licensed veterinarian for the sole purpose of protecting the health of the animal, is prohibited.

6. The use of showing and/or handling practices or devices such as striking animals to cause swelling, using electrical contrivance or other similar practices are not acceptable and are prohibited.

7. Direct criticism or interference with the judge, fair or livestock show management, other exhibitors, breed representatives or show officials before, during or after the competitive event is prohibited. In the furtherance of their official duty, all judges, fair and livestock show management or other show officials shall be treated with courtesy, cooperation and respect and no person shall direct abusive or threatening conduct toward them.

8. No owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer or absolutely responsible person shall conspire with another person or persons to intentionally violate this code of ethics or knowingly contribute or cooperate with another person or persons either by affirmative action or inaction to violate this code of ethics. Violation of this rule shall subject such individual to disciplinary action.

9. The application of this code of ethics provides for absolute responsibility for an animal's condition by an owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer or participant whether or not he or she was actually instrumental in or had actual knowledge of the treatment of the animal in contravention of this code of ethics.

10. The act of entering an animal is the giving of consent by the owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer or absolutely responsible person to have disciplinary action taken by the fair or livestock show for violation of this Code of Show Ring Ethics and any other rules of competition of the fair or livestock show without recourse against the fair or livestock show. The act of entering an animal is the giving of consent that any proceedings or disciplinary action taken by the fair or livestock show may be published with the name of the violator or violators in any publication of the International Association of Fairs and Expositions, including Fairs and Expositions and any special notices to members.

11. The act of entering of an animal in a fair or livestock show is the giving of verification by the owner, exhibitor, fitter, trainer or absolutely responsible person that he or she has read the IAFE National Code of Show Ring Ethics and understands the consequences of and penalties provided for actions prohibited by the code. It is further a consent that any action which contravenes these rules and is also in violation of federal, state or provincial statutes, regulations or rules may be released to appropriate law enforcement authorities with jurisdiction over such infractions.

GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 1. ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR EXHIBITORS - See GENERAL RULES, for eligibility requirements of exhibitors. 2. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ENTRY – The responsibility for making proper entry rests with the 4-H member, not the club and/or project leader. The

division superintendents will check all entries to ensure that animals are properly identified on the appropriate ownership/identification affidavit. The exhibitors of all animals shall conduct themselves with honesty, integrity, good sportsmanship, and abide by all rules and regulations set forth by the University of Nebraska – Lincoln Extension 4-H Youth Development program, Johnson County 4-H Council, and Johnson County Fair Board.

3. GENERAL ANIMAL IDENTIFICATION – Beef (breeding & market), feeder/bucket calf, meat goat (breeding & market), rabbits (breeding & market), sheep (breeding & market), and swine need to be identified with a unique identification number and ownership certified on the appropriate Ownership/Identification Affidavit. Horses, dairy cattle, & dairy/pet goats must be identified on the appropriate Ownership/Identification Affidavit, photo identification is preferred, but drawings will be accepted. Poultry must be identified on the Johnson County 4-H Poultry Ownership Affidavit.

6

Affidavits must be submitted to the Extension Office by close on the deadline stated. Animals can be owned as a family unit, between immediate family members, provided the names and ages of all youth in the family are identified on the affidavit. See specific animal divisions for specific identification requirements. Only those animals identified on the ownership/identification will be allowed to exhibit at the Johnson County Fair. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements. DNA samples must be submitted for all market beef, meat goat, sheep, and swine to be eligible to compete at State Fair and/or Ak-Sar-Ben.

4. OWNERSHIP OF ANIMALS – Beef & dairy cattle, dairy/pet & meat goat, horse, sheep, swine, rabbit, poultry, dog or companion animal project may be owned solely by the 4-H exhibitor or in partnership by the 4-H exhibitor and/or other members of their immediate family (with an exception made for participants in the Rent a Rabbit program). All exhibitor family member names may be in the affidavit, but only the name of the showman can be on the show entry. 4-H exhibitors may show horses or dairy cattle & goats owned by someone outside the immediate family provided they manage (cares for, feeds, trains, grooms, etc.) and has use of the animal as a 4-H project animal at least 75% of the time during the project year; and permission for use of the animal is certified by the owner on the appropriate 4-H ownership affidavit. Animals must be identified on the appropriate ownership affidavits. Affidavits must be completed and turned into the Johnson County Extension Office by close on the deadline date (see below). The Extension Office will submit the affidavits to the State 4-H Office.

Deadline* April 1 4-H Market Beef Ownership Affidavits May 1 4-H Horse Ownership Affidavits May 1 4-H Companion Animal Identification Affidavits June 15 All 4-H Livestock Ownership Affidavits Rabbit Identification Affidavit Market Goat Identification Affidavit Breeding Heifer Ownership Affidavit Breeding Ewe Ownership Affidavit Breeding Doe Ownership Affidavit Market Lamb Ownership Affidavit Market Swine Ownership Affidavit Feeder Calf/Bucket Calf Ownership Affidavit Dairy Identification Affidavit Dairy Goat Identification Affidavit Poultry Ownership Affidavit *If the deadline date falls on a Saturday or Sunday the deadline will be moved to the Monday immediately following the determined deadline date

5. ELIGIBILITY OF ANIMALS - Any 4-H project animal that has been offered for auction, where the intent of the auction is change of ownership, is ineligible to show in Johnson County Fair 4-H livestock classes and any further 4-H livestock shows. A project animal that has been through a “premium only” auction is eligible to be exhibited at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show, provided that it and its exhibitor meet all other ownership and eligibility requirements. 4-H members may not enter the same animal in both the Johnson County Fair 4-H and open class shows, with the exception of horses.

6. PRE-ENTRY – All animal exhibits to be entered in the Johnson County Fair must be pre-entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form and/or Johnson County Fair Horse Entry Form due to the Extension Office by closing July 15 (if July 15 falls on a Saturday or Sunday entries will be due to the Extension Office on the Monday immediately following July 15). All animal exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the county fair and return it to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

7. CONTROL AND REMOVAL OF ANIMALS – Unruly or questionable animals may be declared ineligible to show and dismissed from the premises by the appropriate authority after completing a Johnson County Fair 4-H Animal Release Form. An animal that becomes wild and uncontrollable or sick during the show may be declared ineligible and dismissed by the appropriate authority. No animals will be permitted to run at large on the County Fairgrounds during the fair. Once entered, animals may not be removed from the fairgrounds without the permission of the area and/or overall superintendent and the permission of Johnson County Extension staff and/or Johnson County 4-H Council President and/or licensed veterinarian. To remove animals before the scheduled dismissal time, a Johnson County Fair Animal Dismissal Form must be completed for each animal that is removed. Any animal removed before the official release time without completing a Johnson County Fair Animal Dismissal Form will result in forfeiture of all premium money earned by the exhibitor. All animals must remain in their assigned location throughout the duration of the fair. There is no appeal process for the dismissal of animals.

8. GENERAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ANIMALS • Animals showing signs of infectious or contagious diseases will not be allowed to show. • UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MAY ANIMALS UNDER QUARANTINE BE EXHIBITED. • Any animal found to be infected with an infectious, contagious or otherwise transmissible disease or is suspected of being infected or exposed

to such disease shall be removed immediately and placed in quarantine as ordered and directed by an official licensed veterinarian. A Johnson County Fair Animal Release Form must be completed for each animal being removed.

• CASTRATION POLICY o Cattle/goats/sheep/swine must have been castrated at least two weeks prior to the Johnson County Fair. If the animal has been banded

the testicles must have dropped completely and the area must be healed before the fair. • POLICY ON RINGWORM, WARTS AND ABSCESSES

o Animals that have active ringworm, visible warts or abscesses, will not be allowed to remain on the premises and be exhibited. o The inspecting veterinarian may judge the ringworm to be inactive if the lesion is not encrusted and hair has begun to regrow in the area. o Animals with warts that are visible by a hands-off inspection will not be allowed to remain on the premises or be exhibited. o Animals that have visible abscesses will not be allowed to remain on the premises or be exhibited. o Sheep that have active club lamb fungus as determined by the inspecting veterinarian, will not be allowed to remain on the premises or

be exhibited. • LARGE ANIMAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

o BEEF AND DAIRY CATTLE – NO Tuberculosis or Brucellosis tests are required to exhibit. o SHEEP AND GOATS – ALL sheep and goats being exhibited, must be tagged with an official scrapie USDA-approved eartag (for more

information go to: http://www.eradicatescrapie.org). Under no circumstances may sheep and goats be exhibited which originate from scrapie-source or scrapie-infected flocks.

o SWINE – All swine shall originate directly from any herd not under quarantine for pseudorabies and; 1.) A stage IV or V county; or 2.) A pseudorabies qualified herd; or 3.) Be individually tested and classified negative for pseudorabies within 30 days prior to exhibition.

o HORSES – NO coggins testing required. o POULTRY – No testing requirements.

7

9. ANIMAL TESTING AND EXAMINATION – Any animal entered in 4-H classes at the Johnson County Fair is subject to any type of testing at the discretion of the area superintendent, overall livestock superintendent, and/or official show veterinarian. If the results indicate the possible use of compounds or drugs not approved for use in that species by the FDA or compounds or drugs used outside the specified withdrawal requirements of the FDA, these animals will be declared ineligible for completion and awards. In the case of market animals, show management will determine the appropriate disposal method for the animal. An animal that is tampered with the change appearance or weight may be declared ineligible by the division and/or overall superintendent.

10. QUALITY ASSURANCE TRAINING – All exhibitors in beef (breeding, bucket/feeder calf & market), dairy cattle, goats (dairy, meat & pet), poultry, rabbits (breeding & market), sheep (breeding & market), and swine must have received Quality Assurance training or passed the appropriate test through UNL Extension prior to exhibiting in the 4-H shows at Johnson County Fair. Training must be completed by June 15.

11. DESIGNATED SHOWMAN – All animals must be shown before the judge by an eligible 4-H member. Only animals exhibited by their owner(s) will receive ribbons and/or prizes unless the owner(s) are excused by the division and/or overall superintendent. When animals are entered on County Fair entry day each 4-H member of a family holding their animals in joint ownership must designate who is going to show each animal. Animals held in joint ownership will normally be shown by the designated member except when an exhibitor has more than one animal in a class.

12. SUBSTITUTE SHOWMAN – An animal must be shown before the judge by the 4-H member who entered it unless the exhibitor is excused by the division and/or overall superintendent because of serious illness, disability due to an injury, or conflict with other classes in a 4-H show. An exhibitor who has more than one animal in a class need not secure approval for another eligible 4-H member to show the additional animal in the class. Substitute showman must be capable of assisting with showing a specific animal species and completed the required testing/training for the species being shown (Quality Assurance training or Horse Level testing). The substitute does not have to be enrolled in project but should be knowledgeable of the particular species they are showing. The substitute is required to check in with the area superintendent or designated ring assistant and adhere to all showmanship and dress code rules.

13. ANIMAL SUBSTITUTIONS – Within the same class or division, substituting a different animal for an animal that has been pre-entered, identified on the appropriate affidavit by the deadline, and meets all ownership and eligibility rules, is acceptable and does not require prior approval. Substitutions between divisions, except within breeding beef, dairy, and goats is not allowed (i.e. a market lamb cannot be substituted for a breeding sheep entry, etc.). For breeding beef, dairy, and goats, whereas breed is listed as a separate division, substitutions between divisions is allowed (i.e. an Angus heifer can substitute for a Charolais heifer, etc.).

14. GROOMING OF LIVESTOCK • Caring for and grooming the animals is primarily the responsibility of the 4-H member; however, their parent(s)/guardian(s) may help. The 4-

H member must be present for all grooming unless he or she is in the show ring. Failure to abide by this rule will result in the dropping of one ribbon placing.

• Swine must be shown without hairdressing compounds. This includes oil, powder, or any other coat dressing compound. Only unadulterated water is permitted. Pigs found in violation will be disqualified.

• Exhibitor shall not add materials, natural or synthetic, which extend body shapes beyond normal limits. • Horse Tails (found in Nebraska 4-H Horse Show and Judging Guide (4-H 373))

o Western horse tails should be long and combed out. o Upper part of tail on three-gaited American Saddle horses may be roached while the upper tail of the hunter and jumper may be

braided. Five-gated American Saddle horses and American Saddlebred Pleasure horses are shown with a full mane and tail and must be carried naturally.

o Other breeds of light horses should be shown with tails grown out and well brushed. o Tails may be lengthened by hair-to-hair attachment, but no attachment of any kind to the tailbone.

• Beef shows including Showmanship, Market Beef, and Breeding Beef will be “Blow and Go”; animals may be clipped, blown, and brushed or combed to enhance their appearance. Blow and Go show guidelines are as follows:

o Beef animals will be shown free of any adhesive, glue, paint, or powder products. o Any compounds that have adhesive qualities that when applied cannot be combed or brushed through or alter the color of the

animal are forbidden. These products include (but are not limited to commonly used adhesives and colorants such as): Prime Time, EZ Comb, Tail adhesive, Ultra White Touch-Up, Black Touch-Up, Black Finisher, and black show foam.

o Alcohol, water, oil, foam or any water- or alcohol-based products with no adhesives or glue qualities or artificial colorings are permitted. These products include conditioners and commonly used sprays such as: Kleen Sheen, Revive, Final Bloom and white show foam.

o Paint will be allowed on the hooves and dewclaws only. • If an exhibitor is found to be violating any of the above stated rules, the exhibitor and their involved animal will forfeit their placing, awards,

and premium money. 15. FEED AND BEDDING – Exhibitors, at their own expense, must furnish feed and bedding. All stalls must use approved bedding. The sale of feed

and bedding to exhibitors on the fairgrounds is prohibited. 16. STALLING – All animals must remain in their assigned location throughout the duration of the fair. Each horse exhibitor must stall at least one

horse at the fair, unless room is limited or doing so would endanger the animal and/or public. In these cases, the superintendent may allow 4-H members to take their horses home.

17. EQUIPMENT – Livestock area and overall superintendents have the authority to dictate where blocking chutes, generators, etc. are to be located. When determining locations for equipment, superintendents must consider the safety of exhibitors, volunteers, animals, and the public.

18. STATE FIRE MARSHALL – The use of flammable and combustible grooming sprays inside the barns is strictly forbidden; these materials must be used outside of building only. Smoking and all open flames are prohibited inside the barns.

19. DRESS CODE – All exhibitors exhibiting at the Johnson County Fair 4-H shows or premium sale are required to meet the dress code standards for the specific species being exhibited. HORSE (found in Nebraska 4-H Horse Show and Judging Guide (4-H 373)) • A western hat must be worn and should stay on during the performance. Hats are optional only in barrel racing and pole bending. If the rider

enters the arena wearing a hat, the hat must stay on in barrel racing and pole bending (two-second penalty for losing hat). Feathers, if present, may not protrude beyond the outer edge of the brim nor above the top of the crown.

• Shirts and blouses must be all white, including buttons, thread, etc., with convertible collars (one that is meant to be folded at the seam line and may or may not be button up at the base of the neck). Tuxedo, turtleneck, or other stand-up collars are not permitted. No rhinestones, silver collar tips, or similar embellishments on blouses are permitted. Sheer, see-through blouses are inappropriate and not permitted. Sleeveless shirts and blouses are not permitted. Long sleeves are recommended, although short sleeves are permitted. Rain or cold weather may alter dress code when approved by the area superintendent(s) and the judge.

• Dark blue denim jeans must be worn and a belt is recommended. Heavy contrasting threading, fringes, rhinestones, or other excessive embellishments are not permitted.

• Color of hat, gloves, boots, chaps, etc. is the exhibitor’s choice.

8

• Hard-soled shoes or boots are considered safe and appropriate. Boots with waffle-type tread greater than or equal to 1/8 inch will not be allowed in riding classes.

• A 4-H armband is required at the Johnson County Fair 4-H horse show. Armband is to be worn on the left arm above the elbow. • Spurs are permissible but must be dull and rowels must be free moving. • Exhibitor numbers will be assigned to all exhibitors and must be worn in the ring during the show. LARGE & SMALL ANIMAL (Beef, bucket calf, dairy cattle & goat, meat goat, poultry, rabbit, sheep, and swine) • An approved 4-H t-shirt must be worn (State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben shirts will not be allowed). • Dark blue jeans are required and a belt is recommended. Excessive embellishments are not permitted. • White pants are allowed instead of dark blue jeans for dairy cattle and goat exhibitors. • Shoes or boots must provide adequate protection and comfort for the exhibitor. Exhibitors showing in the beef, bucket calf, and dairy divisions

are required to wear hard soled shoes or boots. • No hats, caps, or other types of headgear are allowed to be worn in the show ring (accommodations will be made for an individual’s religious

beliefs.) • Exhibitor numbers will be assigned to all exhibitors and must be worn in the ring during the show.

20. ARRIVAL DEADLINE – Arrival and entry deadlines for all animals are listed on the Johnson County Fair 4-H Schedule of Events. Division superintendents may make exceptions for certain situations provided arrangements are made in advance and approved by the overall livestock superintendent.

21. REQUIREMENTS FOR CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Any animal entry must be awarded first or second purple in a class to be eligible to compete for champion or reserve champion.

22. 4-H PREMIUM SALE – 4-H market livestock, must be shown at the Johnson County Fair in the appropriate 4-H show to be eligible for the 4-H Premium Sale and must meet the Premium Sale weight requirements for a market animal. The sale is a “premium only” auction in which change of ownership is never the intent. Each 4-H member is limited to selling a total of 2 market animals. They may sell 2 market beef, 2 market swine, 2 market sheep, 2 market meat goats, 2 market rabbits, a pen of three market broilers (considered one unit), or a combination such as: 1 beef and 1 swine, 1 swine and 1 sheep, 1 meat goat and 1 pen of broilers, etc. Exhibitors must indicate their intentions in regards to premium sale participation when animals are entered and weighed-in. Appropriate 4-H attire must be worn for the 4-H premium sale (see DRESS CODE). Substitute showmen will be allowed for 4-H members who need to leave early to travel to college. If a 4-H exhibitor needs to utilize a substitute showman they must notify the Extension Office prior to the beginning of the Premium Sale.

PREMIUM SALE WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS SPECIES MINIMUM MAXIMUM Beef British Breed, Crossbred & Other Breeds (Steers & Heifers) 950 lbs. None Miniature/Heritage Breeds & Bucket Calf +1 (Steers & Heifers) 600 lbs. None Dairy Dairy Steers 850 lbs. None Goat Market Meat Goat 50 lbs. None Poultry Market Broiler Pen of 3 3.75 lbs. average for pen None Rabbit Fryer 3 lbs. 5 lbs. Roaster 8 lbs. None Sheep Market Sheep 80 lbs. None Swine Market Swine 200 lbs. 300 lbs.

23. FAIR CLEAN UP (DAILY AND AT CLOSE) – Exhibitors failing to clean their stalls, alleys, and assigned areas each day of the fair and at the close of the fair will forfeit all of their premium money.

24. AUTHORITY – Each division superintendent with the approval of the overall livestock superintendent shall have the authority to make all decisions within their respective area of responsibility in accordance with the rules and regulations set forth in the Johnson County Fair 4-H Fair Book and the policies put in place by University of Nebraska – Lincoln Extension 4-H Youth Development program and the Johnson County 4-H Council.

GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES 1. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS - All 4-H members, who are exhibiting their own animals in beef, dairy, goat, horse, poultry, rabbit, sheep, and swine

divisions are automatically entered as participants in the showmanship division and are strongly encouraged to participate. 2. ELIGIBILTY – An exhibitor may only show animals in showmanship that are identified on the proper affidavit and entered under their name; one or

more member of the same family may not use the same animal. 3. DIVISIONS – 4-H exhibitors will be divided into three divisions according to their age as of December 31st of the preceding year.

• Senior Division – 14 years of age and older • Intermediate Division – 11 to 13 years of age • Junior Division – 8 to 10 years of age Winners of these divisions will not compete against each other for selection of an overall showman.

4. BASIS FOR JUDGING – Showmanship judging is based on preparation of the animal for show, their apparent training, and the appearance and behavior of the showman. Primarily, the showmanship division evaluates the skill of the exhibitor presenting the animal before the judge, not the animal’s individual excellence.

5. DISQUALIFICATION – The division and/or overall livestock superintendents may disqualify any 4-H exhibitor from showmanship for any violation of rules or unsportsmanlike conduct during the Johnson County Fair.

HERDSMANSHIP GENERAL RULES – HERDSMANSHIP 1. PURPOSE - Animal exhibitors are expected to keep their pens and exhibit area clean, neat, and attractive as possible. The entire area in the

case of club exhibits must also be clean and presented in an attractive manner to the public at all times. 2. PERSONAL RESPONSIBILITY – Herdsmanship duties are the responsibility of the 4-H members, NOT leaders and parents. 3. CLUB RESPONSIBILITY – It is the 4-H member’s responsibility to assist their club with feeding and general care of animals, cleaning of pens

and walkways, and presenting their 4-H exhibit to the public. The 4-H members shall show proper courtesy and conduct at all times. All poultry and rabbits require food and water at all times. The 4-H member or a member of their club is responsible for their care. The area superintendent and/or overall superintendent reserves the right to release 4-H exhibits that are not properly cared for and have not followed the herdsmanship rules.

4. BEGINNING AND ENDING TIME – Herdsmanship begins at the time animals are to be in place and ends when exhibits are released at the end of the Johnson County Fair.

5. JUDGING TIMES – Livestock exhibits may be judged for herdsmanship anytime between 8:00 am (Noon on Sunday) and 8:00 pm.

9

6. JUDGING OF DIVISIONS – Each livestock division: cattle, (beef, bucket calves, and dairy), horses, goats, poultry, rabbits, sheep, and swine will be judged separately.

7. DISPLAY OF ANIMALS – All animals should be in their stalls or pens between 8:00 am and 8:00 pm, except for weighing, washing, showing, and designated exercise periods. All pens and stalls should be clearly identified with club and exhibitor’s name.

8. CLEANING STALLS AND PENS – All stalls and pens should be thoroughly cleaned before 8:00 am. Manure and wet bedding should be collected on an as needed basis throughout the day.

9. CLUB SIGNS – Uniform club signs will be permitted. 10. BASIS OF JUDGING

• Animal – General Appearance (20 points) – animals clean & groomed, stalled/penned at appropriate times (8:00 am – 8:00 pm) • Stall/Pen Area (20 points) – bedding (shavings) clean & adequate amount, water container clean & adequate amount, feed container clean

& adequate amount. • Tack/Exhibitor Area (20 points) – tack area clean & neat, exhibitor/gathering area clean & neat, tack & equipment stored in an orderly &

safe manner. • Aisle (20 points) – aisle clean/orderly & free of debris. • Herdsman/Exhibitor (10 points) – herdsman/exhibitor courteous. • Other/Enhancement of Club Area (10 points) – stall cards posted with complete information, equipment (i.e. fans, clippers, pitchforks,

rakes, chutes, etc.) properly & safely used.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 1 HERDSMANSHIP CLASS 910 Herdsmanship

BEEF CATTLE GENERAL RULES – BEEF CATTLE 1. GENERAL RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMITS – An exhibitor may show a maximum of:

• 4 market beef animals • 4 breeding beef (the cow-calf entry counts as one event in the breeding beef class) • 2 feeder calves (the calf from a cow-calf entry only counts as a separate entry if entered in the feeder calf class) Showmanship and Group of Three classes do not count as entry towards an exhibitor’s maximum.

3. IDENTIFICATION – MARKET BEEF – In order to show at the Johnson County Fair all market beef must be weighed in and ear tagged with the official 4-H ear tag under the supervision of Extension Office staff, by an individual designated by the Johnson County Extension Office Staff and/or 4-H Council at the official Johnson County 4-H Market Beef Weigh In Day. If an exhibitor is unable to participate in Johnson County Market Beef Weigh-In they must contact the Johnson County Extension Office prior to the date in order to make alternative arrangements. A DNA sample must be taken for any market beef animals to be eligible to be exhibited at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show. Market beef DNA collection, weighing, and ear tagging must be completed prior to April 1. All identification for market beef must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Market Beef Ownership/Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office. The affidavit will be completed and submitted at the Market Beef Weigh-In Day. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements. BREEDING BEEF – All breeding beef must be identified with an identification number unique to that animal, acceptable forms of identification for the Johnson County Fair will include tattoos and ear tags. Only official identification tattoos meeting the regulations set forth by the various national beef breed associations will be accepted as fulfilling the requirements for identification to exhibit. Calfhood vaccination tattoos will not be considered an official identification tattoo. All identification of breeding beef must be documented on an Ownership/Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. Heifers must be identified as either market or breeding beef, animals may not be identified under both categories. No individual heifer may show in both market and breeding classes. Breeding heifers carrying a 4-H Market ear tag will not be allowed to show. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements. FEEDER/BUCKET CALF – All feeder and bucket calves must be tagged using appropriate 4-H tags. All identification of feeder and bucket calves must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Feeder Calf/Bucket Calf Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. A DNA sample must be taken for any feeder animal to be eligible to be exhibited at the Ak-Sar-Ben stock show. Feeder calf DNA collection and ear tagging must be completed prior to June 15. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements.

4. PRE-ENTRY - All beef exhibits, including showmanship, must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All beef exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 6. DRESS CODE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 7. QUALITY ASSURANCE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 8. GROOMING RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS

BEEF CATTLE SHOWMANSHIP RULES See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 10 BEEF SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

MARKET BEEF RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – BEEF CATTLE 2. ELIGIBILITY – Steers and heifers (purebreds and crossbreds) born after January 1st of the preceding year are eligible to show in the market

beef class. 3. BUCKET CALF PLUS ONE – Animals shown in the Bucket Calf Plus One class must have been shown by the exhibitor in the 4-H Bucket Calf

class at the Johnson County Fair in the preceding year. Animals must retain their original 4-H ear tag until Johnson County Market Beef Weigh-In when the animal will be tagged with an official 4-H ear tag and weighed in. Steers and heifers and will be shown together and if needed class breaks will be determined by weight.

10

4. SELECTION OF GRAND AND RESERVE CHAMPIONS – A Champion and Reserve Champion will be selected from the following divisions (see below). Heifers in the British breed, other breed, and miniature/heritage breed classes and steers in the Angus, Hereford, Shorthorn, other breed, and miniature/heritage breed classes must exhibit breed characteristics typical of a purebred animal of the breed in which they are entered. Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and Reserve Champion of the division. A Market Beef Grand Champion and Reserve Grand Champion will be selected from the division champions.

Market Heifers • British Breeds • Crossbreds • Other Breed • Miniature/Heritage Breeds

Bucket Calf Plus One • Heifers & Steers

Market Steers • Angus • Shorthorn • Hereford • Other Breed • Crossbreds • Miniature/Heritage Breeds

5. CLASS BREAKS - Will be determined by weight. Classes with less than five entries may be combined into groups of at least 5 head at the discretion of the Beef Superintendent.

6. CLUB GROUP OF THREE MARKET BEEF – Group of three market steers and/or market heifers with ownership by more than one exhibitor enrolled in the same 4-H club.

7. PREMIUM SALE – The minimum weight for British Breed, Crossbred, and Other Breed (Steers& Heifers) to be eligible for the 4-H Premium Sale is 950 lbs. The minimum weight for Miniature/Heritage Breed and Bucket Calf Plus One (Steers & Heifers) to be eligible for the 4-H Premium Sale is 600 lbs. (See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES & REQUIREMENTS)

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 11 MARKET BEEF PREMIUM Purple $8.00 Blue $6.00 Red $4.00 White $2.00 CLASS 910 Market Heifers – British Breeds CLASS 920 Market Heifers – Crossbreds CLASS 930 Market Heifers – Other Breeds CLASS 940 Market Heifers – Miniature/Heritage Breeds CLASS 950 Bucket Calf Plus One CLASS 10 Market Steers – Angus CLASS 20 Market Steers – Shorthorn CLASS 30 Market Steers – Hereford CLASS 40 Market Steers – Crossbreds CLASS 960 Market Steers – Other Breeds CLASS 970 Market Steers – Miniature/Heritage Breeds CLASS 980 Club Group of Market Beef

BREEDING BEEF RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – BEEF CATTLE 2. BREEDING HEIFER CLASSIFICATION – Crossbred breeding heifers will be shown in the commercial heifer division and purebred heifers will

be shown in the appropriate breed division. Heifers in the breed divisions must exhibit breed characteristics typical of a purebred animal of the breed in which they are exhibited.

3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – A Champion and Reserve Champion from each breed division will be selected. A Supreme Champion Breeding Heifer will be selected from division champions. Animals receiving first and second purple places from each division will be eligible to compete for Supreme Champion Breeding Heifer and Supreme Reserve Champion Breeding Heifer. Aged cows, cow/calf pairs, and stocker feeder female champions are not eligible for this selection.

4. CLASSES - Each breed of heifer will show separately. Any breed having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class for all heifers at the discretion of the beef superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups according to their individual merit.

5. SHOW ORDER - Breeding females will be shown from youngest to oldest for the complete breed. Breeds will be shown in alphabetical order beginning with Black Angus.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISIONS 12 – 23 BREEDING BEEF DIVISION 12 Black Angus DIVISION 18 Limousin DIVISION 13 Charolais DIVISION 19 Maine Anjou DIVISION 14 Chianina DIVISION 20 Red Angus DIVISION 15 Commercial DIVISION 21 Shorthorn DIVISION 16 Gelbvieh DIVISION 22 Simmental DIVISION 17 Hereford & Polled Hereford DIVISION 23 All Other Breeds

BREEDING BEEF CLASSES (Each breed will show separately, from youngest to oldest) PREMIUM Purple $8.00 Blue $6.00 Red $4.00 White $2.00 CLASS 910 Senior Yearling Heifer July – December, 2 years ago CLASS 10 Junior Yearling Heifer January – February, last year CLASS 20 Spring Yearling Heifer March – April, last year CLASS 30 Summer Yearling Heifer May – June, last year CLASS 40 Fall Heifer Calves July – August, last year CLASS 50 Fall Heifer Calves September – October, last year CLASS 60 Fall Heifer Calves November – December, last year CLASS 920 Cow-Calf CLASS 930 Aged Cow Born on or before July 1, 2 years ago

FEEDER CALF RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – BEEF CATTLE 2. ELIGIBILITY - Any beef breed calf born between January 1 and June 1 of the current year. Feeder calves are not eligible for the premium sale. 3. UNWEANED CALVES - Unweaned calves may be brought to the fair and taken home on the day of the show if not accompanied by its mother. 4. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION - A champion and reserve champion calf will be selected from each of the classes. 5. CLASS BREAKS - Will be determined by age. Classes will be shown from youngest to oldest. Any class having less than five head checked in

may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the superintendent. 6. SHOW ORDER - Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

11

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 27 FEEDER CALVES PREMIUM Purple $5.00 Blue $4.00 Red $3.00 White $2.00 CLASS 901 British Breed Feeder Calf Female CLASS 902 British Breed Feeder Calf Male CLASS 903 Cross/Other Breed Feeder Calf Female CLASS 904 Cross/Other Breed Feeder Calf Male

RATE OF GAIN RULES 1. PREMIUMS – Premiums will be paid on only the first five places in each class. 2. ELIGIBILITY – All market beef animals entered at the fair are eligible. 3. CALCULATING – The average daily gain will be determined using the Market Beef Weigh-In Day weight and date plus the County Fair weight

and date.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 11 RATE OF GAIN PREMIUM 1st $35 2nd $30 3rd $25 4th $20 5th $15 CLASS 990 Rate of Gain Steer CLASS 995 Rate of Gain Heifer BEEF FITTING CONTEST 1. TEAMS – Each team will consist of two 4-H members who are enrolled in the Johnson County 4-H program. Participants do not need to be

enrolled in the beef project but must have received Quality Assurance training or passed the appropriate test through UNL Extension prior to participating in the Beef Fitting Contest at Johnson County Fair. Training must be completed by June 15.

2. DIVISIONS – There will be three divisions a Junior Division (ages 8 – 13 years old), a Senior Division (ages 14 – 18 years old), and a Mixed Division. If team is comprised of a 4-H member who is a Junior (8 – 13 years old) and a 4-H member who is Senior (14 -18 years old) the team will compete in the Mixed Division.

3. EQUIPMENT – Teams must provide their own equipment. Each team will be allowed: one blocking chute, one blower, one set of clippers, and other needed fitting and showing accessories. Once the contest time begins, no team member may leave the area and no additional equipment may be brought into the fitting area.

4. ANIMALS – Each team will select a market steer, market heifer, or breeding heifer that either belongs to one of the team members or is borrowed from another 4-H exhibitor. The animal must be identified on the appropriate Ownership Affidavit and be entered as an exhibit in the Johnson County Fair 4-H Beef Show. All cattle must report to the contest area dry, clipped, and completely free of any artificial substances. Each animal will be lightly misted to confirm the animal is unfitted.

5. METHODS – Contestants may not use inappropriate fitting methods. These may include but are not limited to: any altering of the natural color of the animal by the use of dyes, paints, hair coloring conditions, colored show foam, graphite, colored powders or other substances; the addition of any hair or hair like substances (including twine), false tailheads, false polls, and false tail switches.

6. TIME – There will be a 30-minute time limit. Once time has been called all teams must cease working on their animals. If fitting is continued after time is called, the team will be automatically disqualified. Periodic time announcements will be made throughout the contest.

7. PRESENTATION – After the 30-minute fitting time limit, one team member will hold the entry in the designated area. All other team members must be beside the anima but are not allowed to continue fitting the animal after time is called.

8. AUDIENCE – All audience members must remain out of the area designated as the contest space and is not allowed to communicate with the participants in any fashion.

9. JUDGING – Judging will be based on the completion and final appearance of the animal and judge’s questions for the team members (these will be related to their animal, products, or fitting methods).

10. PRE-ENTRY – Teams must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to participate at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 99 FITTING CONTEST PREMIUM Purple $5.00 Blue $4.00 Red $3.00 White $2.00 CLASS 901 Fitting Contest – Junior Division CLASS 902 Fitting Contest – Senior Division CLASS 903 Fitting Contest – Mixed Division

BUCKET CALF GENERAL RULES – BUCKET CALF 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - An exhibitor may show only one bucket calf. Calves shown in the bucket calf class will not be allowed to show in any other

classes during the current year’s Johnson County Fair. This includes the showmanship classes. 3. IDENTIFICATION - Bucket calves must be tagged with a 4-H ear tag available from the Extension Office. Identification of bucket calves must be

documented on a Nebraska 4-H Feeder Calf/Bucket Calf Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15.

4. PRE-ENTRY – All bucket calf exhibits must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All bucket calf exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

5. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 7. ELIGIBILITY - Calves shown in the Bucket Calf division shall be born between January 1 and June 1 of the current year. Bucket calves are not

eligible for the Premium Sale. 8. CLASS BREAKS - The show will be divided on the 4-H member’s age on December 31st of the preceding year and prior experience in the

bucket calf project. The Clover Kid Pet Show will not count as prior experience exhibiting bucket calves. 9. GRAND AND RESERVE CHAMPION - A champion and reserve champion calf will be selected from Intermediate Novice Division, Junior

Novice Division, Intermediate Expert Division, and Junior Expert Division. An overall grand champion bucket calf project will not be selected. 10. RECORD BOOKS - Bucket Calf Record Books are available from the Extension Office; they must be turned into a Johnson County Extension

staff member at the time of check in. The judge will evaluate completed record books before the show begins. 11. JUDGING – Dairy and/or beef quality of the calf will not be considered

Evaluation of the completed record book 35% Evaluation of the member’s knowledge by interview 35%

12

Quality and condition of the animal 15% Evidence of training and showing 15%

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 49 BUCKET CALF PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 920 Intermediate Novice Division 11 to 13 years of age as of December 31st, No prior experience exhibiting bucket calves CLASS 930 Junior Novice Division 8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st, No prior experience exhibiting bucket calves CLASS 940 Intermediate Expert Division 11 to 13 years of age as of December 31st, Prior experience exhibiting bucket calves CLASS 950 Junior Expert Division 8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st, Prior experience exhibiting bucket calves

DAIRY CATTLE GENERAL RULES – DAIRY CATTLE 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - There is no limit on the number of dairy cattle an exhibitor may show. 3. IDENTIFICATION –

DARIY HEIFERS & COWS - All identification of dairy heifers and cows must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Dairy Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15. With the affidavit photo identification is preferred, but drawings will be accepted. Animals not owned by the exhibitor must have the owner’s signature on the affidavit, giving the exhibitor permission to use the animal as a project. See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. DAIRY STEERS – In order to show at the Johnson County Fair all dairy steers must be tagged with the official 4-H ear tag. Dairy Steer ear tagging must be completed prior to June 15. All identification for dairy steers for the Johnson County Fair must be documented on a 4-H Dairy Steer Ownership/Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. Please contact the Extension Office for Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements.

4. PRE-ENTRY - All dairy cattle exhibits, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All dairy cattle exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 6. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 7. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 8. GROOMING RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 9. STALLING EXCEPTION - Dairy cows in production may come the day of the show and leave immediately after the Dairy Cattle Show. 10. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION - A champion and reserve champion will be selected from all dairy breed heifer and cow classes. 11. CLASSES - Each dairy breed will show separately, unless there are less than five head total then classes will be combined and animals will be

shown in either a purebred or crossbred class. Breeds will be shown in alphabetical order from youngest to oldest. Any breed having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

12. PREMIUM SALE – The minimum weight for Dairy Steers to be eligible for the 4-H Premium Sale is 850 lbs. (See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES & REQUIREMENTS).

DAIRY CATTLE SHOWMANSHIP RULES See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 40 DAIRY SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

DEPARTMENT G DIVISIONS 41-48 DAIRY CATTLE DIVISION 41 Ayrshire DIVISION 45 Jersey DIVISION 42 Brown Swiss DIVISION 46 Milking Shorthorn DIVISION 43 Guernsey DIVISION 47 Crossbred Dairy DIVISION 44 Holstein DIVISION 48 Other Dairy

DAIRY CATTLE CLASSES (Each breed will show separately) PREMIUM Purple $8.00 Blue $6.00 Red $4.00 White $2.00 CLASS 910 Spring Heifer Calves March – April, this year CLASS 915 Winter Heifer Calves December, last year – February, this year CLASS 920 Fall Heifer Calves September – November, last year CLASS 925 Summer Yearlings June – August, last year CLASS 930 Spring Yearlings March – May, last year CLASS 935 Winter Yearlings December, 2 years ago – February last year CLASS 940 Fall Yearlings September, 2 years ago – November, 2 years ago CLASS 945 Dry Cow/Any Age CLASS 950 Two Year Olds September, 3 years ago – August, 2 years ago CLASS 955 Three Year Olds September, 4 years ago – August, 3 years ago CLASS 960 Four Year Olds September, 5 years ago – August, 4 years ago CLASS 965 Five Year Olds & Older Prior to September, 5 years ago CLASS 970 Dairy Steers (Born after January 1st of the preceding year)

GOATS GENERAL RULES – GOATS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 2. ENTRY LIMIT – An exhibitor is limited to (best dressed, Mother-Daughter, and Showmanship classes do not count as an entry):

• 4 market meat goats • 4 breeding meat goats • 4 dairy and/or pet goats

3. IDENTIFICATION –

13

DAIRY GOATS – All identification of dairy goats must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Dairy Goat Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15. With the affidavit, photo identification is preferred, but drawings will be accepted. Animals not owned by the exhibitor must have the owner’s signature on the affidavit, giving the exhibitor permission to use the animal as a project. See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS PET GOATS – All identification of pet goats must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Dairy Goat Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15. With the affidavit, photo identification is preferred, but drawings will be accepted. MARKET MEAT GOATS – In order to show at the Johnson County Fair, Nebraska State Fair, or Ak-Sar-Ben Stock Show, all market meat goats must be ear tagged with the official 4-H ear tag. A DNA sample must be taken for any market meat goat animals to be eligible to be exhibited at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show. Market meat goat ear tagging and DNA collection must be completed prior to June 15. All identification for market meat goats for the Johnson County Fair must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Market Meat Goat Ownership/Identification Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements. BREEDING MEAT GOATS – All breeding meat goats must be ear tagged with an official 4-H ear tag or tattooed with an identification number unique to that animal. All identification for breeding meat goats must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Breeding Doe Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. Does must be identified as either market or breeding meat goats, animals may not be identified under both categories. No individual animal may show in both market and breeding classes. Breeding does carrying a 4-H Market ear tag will not be allowed to show.

4. SCRAPIES TAGS – ALL goats being exhibited, must be tagged with an official USDA-approved ear tag. This tag is in addition to the official 4-H ear tag. Tags cannot be shared with other exhibitors; each family must have their own tag.

5. PRE-ENTRY - All goat exhibits (meat, dairy & pet), including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All goat exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

6. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 7. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 9. GROOMING RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS

GOAT SHOWMANSHIP RULES See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 53 GOAT SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

DAIRY GOAT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – GOATS 2. RECOGNIZED BREEDS – Alpine, LaMancha, Nubian, Oberhasli, Saanens, and Toggenburg 3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Dairy Goat. 4. CLASSES – Registered and commercial animals will be shown together. Class breaks will be determined by age. Classes will be shown from

youngest to oldest. Any class having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the goat superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 51 DAIRY GOAT PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 910 Junior Doe Under 5 months CLASS 920 Intermediate Doe 5 to 8 months CLASS 930 Senior Doe 8 months to 1 year CLASS 940 Non-milking doe 1 to 2 years CLASS 950 Milking Doe Under 2 years CLASS 960 Milking Doe 2 to 3 years CLASS 970 Milking Doe 4 years and older CLASS 985 Mother/Daughter

PET GOAT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – GOATS 2. CLASSIFICATION – Goats that are not recognized as a dairy or meat goat, but rather kept as a companion animal (i.e. pygmy goats). 3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Pet Goat. 4. CLASSES – Pet goats must be does or wethers (NO bucks permitted) and will be shown together. Class breaks will be determined by age.

Classes will be shown from youngest to oldest. Any class having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the goat superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 52 PET GOAT PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 901 Pet Goat Under 12 months of age CLASS 902 Pet Goat Over 12 months of age

MARKET MEAT GOAT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – GOATS 2. RECOGNIZED BREEDS – Boer, Brush, Kiko, Myotonic, and Spanish 3. WEIGHT ELIGIBILITY – Meat goats weighing less than 50 lbs. will show in the feeder goat class and will not be eligible to compete for Grand

Champion Market Meat Goat. 4. GRAND CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Grand

Champion and Reserve Grand Champion Market Meat Goat. 5. CLASSES – Market class breaks will be determined by weight, does and wethers will show together. Any class having less than five head

checked in may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the goat superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

14

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 58 MARKET MEAT GOAT PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 920 Feeder Goat 49 lbs. or under CLASS 10 Market Goat 50 lbs. and over

BREEDING MEAT GOAT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – GOATS 2. RECOGNIZED BREEDS – Boer, Brush, Kiko, Myotonic, and Spanish 3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Breeding Meat Goat. 4. CLASSES – Only does may be shown, NO bucks. Registered and commercial animals will be shown together. Class breaks will be

determined by age. Classes will be shown from youngest to oldest. Any class having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class at the discretion of the goat superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups on their individual merit.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 59 BREEDING MEAT GOATS PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 910 Doe Kids Born March – May, this year CLASS 920 Doe Kids Born January – February, this year CLASS 930 Doe Kids Born Fall of last year CLASS 940 Yearling Doe Born March – May, last year CLASS 950 Yearling Doe Born January – February, last year CLASS 960 Yearling Doe Born Fall two years ago CLASS 970 Aged Does 2 years old & older

BEST DRESSED GOAT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – GOATS 2. PURPOSE – Exhibitors are encouraged to enter the Best Dressed Goat contest and to use their imagination to design a costume for their 4-H

goat. The attire should emphasize the personality of the animal. 3. PRE-ENTRY – Exhibitors must enter the contest on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to participate at the

Johnson County Fair. 4. ELIGIBILITY – Any exhibitor showing dairy, pet, or meat goats may participate. The goat exhibited must be identified on an

ownership/identification affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15. 5. DRESS CODE – 4-H members are not required to follow the dress code when participating in the Best Dressed Goat contest. They may wear

an outfit that compliments their goat’s attire. 6. CHAMPION – A Champion Best Dressed Goat and a Champion Best Dressed Duo will be selected.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 53 BEST DRESSED GOAT CLASS 940 Best Dressed Goat Only goat is in costume CLASS 950 Best Dressed Duo Both exhibitor and goat are in costume

HORSES GENERAL RULES – HORSES 1. GENERAL RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - An exhibitor is limited to a TOTAL of 6 horses at the Johnson County Fair. Only one horse per class per contestant, except in

halter classes. A single horse may not be entered or ridden in a class or event by more than one exhibitor; a family project horse may NOT be entered twice in the same event.

3. IDENTIFICATION - All horses and ponies must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Horse Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on May 1. With the affidavit photo identification is preferred, but drawings will be accepted. Colts born after May 1 to mares who have been identified by May 1 may be shown only if identified on a Nebraska 4-H Horse Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office within two weeks of the birthdate.

4. OWNERSHIP - Horses can be jointly owned ONLY by 4-H members of the same family/household if all 4-H members’ names are listed on the affidavit and all 4-H members abide by the ownership rules found in GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. Horses not owned by the exhibitor must have the owner’s signature on the affidavit, giving the exhibitor permission to use the animal as a project. See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS.

5. PRE-ENTRY - In order to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair, all horse exhibitors must enter the classes they wish to participate in on a Johnson County Horse Entry Form. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. When entering classes exhibitors must indicate which horse they will be using for each class. All horse exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

6. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 7. DRESS CODE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 8. GROOMING RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 9. AGE DIVISIONS - There will be a Junior, Intermediate, and Senior class in the divisions (events) designated. 4-H members 14 years of age and

over as of December 31st of the preceding year will be in the Senior Class. 4-H members 11 to 13 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year will be in the Intermediate Class. 4-H members 8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year will be in the Junior Class.

10. SUBSTITUTE SHOWMAN - A substitute showman will be allowed only in the halter classes if the exhibitor has more than 1 horse entered in the class. The substitute showman must be capable of assisting with showing horses and completed the required horse level testing. The substitute does not have to be enrolled in project but should be knowledgeable of horses. The substitute is required to check in with the area superintendent or designated ring assistant and adhere to all showmanship and dress code rules.

11. STALLS - Each horse exhibitor must stall at least one horse at the fair, unless room is limited or doing so would endanger the animal and/or public. In these cases, the superintendent may allow 4-H members to take their horses home.

12. LEVEL TESTING - All 4-H horse exhibitors must take and pass the Level I test by June 15 given by qualified horse personnel to compete at the Johnson County Fair. To be eligible for District Horse Show competition an exhibitor must have passed Level II testing by May 1. More information about Horse Level Testing is available at the Johnson County Extension Office.

15

13. NEBRASKA EQUINE ACTIVITY STATUTE - Under Nebraska Law, an equine professional is not liable for an injury to or the death of a participant in equine activities resulting from the inherent risks of equine activities, pursuant to sections 25-21, 249 to 25-21, 25 Nebraska Revised Statutes

14. EXERCISE TIMES - Exercise times will be announced, upon approval of the horse superintendent(s). 15. SHOW SCHEDULE - Horse superintendent(s) shall have the authority to make decisions regarding the Johnson County Fair 4-H Horse Show

schedule of events in order for the show to run in a smooth and timely manner. 16. PATTERNS - Patterns for reining, showmanship, horsemanship, etc. will be posted by the judge. The superintendent(s) will post patterns for

trail. 17. SHOW GUIDELINES - The Johnson County Fair 4-H Horse Show will follow the guidelines set forth in the Nebraska 4-H Horse Show and

Judging Guide (4-H 373). Books are available through the Extension Office. 18. CHAMPION HORSEMAN - A Champion Horseman will be selected from the Senior Division (riders ages 14 and over as of December 31st) and

Junior Division (riders ages 8 to 13 as of December 31st). Points will be awarded to each horse and rider team (one horse/one rider). Points will be awarded as follows:

• White ribbon = 1 point • Red ribbon = 2 points • Blue ribbon = 3 points • Purple ribbon = 4 points • Reserve Champion = 1 extra point • Champion = 2 extra points Only purple ribbon winners are eligible to compete for championships. Therefore, a second-place purple within a class will be considered a Reserve Champion. Ties will be broken using the most championships; reserve championships; purple ribbons and so on until a winner is determined.

HORSE SHOWMANSHIP RULES See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 260 HORSE SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 10 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 20 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 30 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

HALTER CLASS RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORSES 2. CLASSES – All breeds, including grade, shall show in the same class. Individual horses will be judged against the standards for that particular

breed. Male and female ponies, miniature horses, and donkeys will be shown in the same class. 3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from classes 1-5 will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Female Halter Horse. Animals receiving first and second purple places from classes 6-10 will compete for Champion and Reserve Champion Male Halter Horse. Animals receiving first and second purple places from classes 11 & 12 will compete for Champion and Reserve Champion Pony/Miniature/Donkey Halter Horse. An overall grand champion halter horse will not be selected.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 261 HALTER HORSE CLASSES PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Weanling Filly CLASS 2 Yearling Filly CLASS 3 Two-year old Mare CLASS 4 Three-year old Mare CLASS 5 Four years and older Mare CLASS 6 Weanling Colt CLASS 7 Yearling Gelding CLASS 8 Two-year old Gelding CLASS 9 Three-year old Gelding CLASS 10 Four years and older Gelding CLASS 11 Pony All types and ages CLASS 12 Miniatures All types and ages CLASS 13 Donkeys All types and ages

PERFORMANCE/PLEASURE CLASS RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORSES 2. WALK/TROT – The walk/trot class is only for 4-H members who have been enrolled in the horse project for two years or less. Riders competing

in this class are not eligible for any other pleasure classes. 3. SNAFFLE BIT – The snaffle bit class is for horses 4 years of age and younger. Horses competing in this class are not eligible for any other

pleasure classes. 4. PATTERNS – The judge will post patterns for reining, horsemanship, etc. The superintendent(s) will post patterns for trail. Patterns and rules

can be found in the Nebraska 4-H Horse Show and Judging Guide (4-H 373). PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 263 WALK/TROT CLASS 1 Walk/Trot Western Pleasure DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 264 SNAFFLE BIT CLASS 1 Snaffle Bit DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 265 WESTERN PLEASURE CLASS 1 Western Pleasure Senior CLASS 2 Western Pleasure Intermediate CLASS 3 Western Pleasure Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 268 WESTERN HORSEMANSHIP CLASS 1 Western Horsemanship Senior CLASS 2 Western Horsemanship Intermediate CLASS 3 Western Horsemanship Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 270 WESTERN RIDING CLASS 1 Western Riding Senior

16

CLASS 2 Western Riding Intermediate CLASS 3 Western Riding Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 271 REINING CLASS 1 Reining Senior CLASS 2 Reining Intermediate CLASS 3 Reining Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 275 TRAIL HORSE CLASS 1 Trail Horse Senior CLASS 2 Trail Horse Intermediate CLASS 3 Trail Horse Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 276 RANCH HORSE PLEASURE CLASS 1 Ranch Horse Pleasure Senior CLASS 2 Ranch Horse Pleasure Intermediate CLASS 3 Ranch Horse Pleasure Junior

MINIATURE PLEASURE DRIVING 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORSES 2. ATTIRE – Requires appropriate Western or English attire (See GENERAL ANIMALS RULES & REQUIREMENTS) 3. JUDGING – To be judged on quality of performance, manners, way of going of horse, conformation, appropriateness, condition and fit of vehicle

and harness and neatness of attire in that order. 4. GAIT REQUIREMENTS – Walk, collected trot, and working trot 5. RULES - Rules will follow the American Miniature Horse Registry Rule Book.

PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 290 PLEASURE DRIVING CLASS 1 Miniature Pleasure Driving All Sizes (all ages)

SPEED CLASS RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORSES 2. PENALTIES – Penalties for speed classes are set forth in the Nebraska 4-H Horse Show and Judging Guide (4-H 373):

• Contestants who are disqualified will receive participation ribbons. • A two second penalty will be assessed for each pole or barrel knocked down. • Riders must dismount before leaving the arena. • Hats are not necessary; however, a two second penalty will be assessed for hats lost during the run.

PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 280 BARREL RACING CLASS 1 Barrel Racing Senior CLASS 2 Barrel Racing Intermediate CLASS 3 Barrel Racing Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 281 POLE BENDING CLASS 1 Pole Bending Senior CLASS 2 Pole Bending Intermediate CLASS 3 Pole Bending Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 282 KEY HOLE RACE CLASS 1 Key Hole Race Senior CLASS 2 Key Hole Race Intermediate CLASS 3 Key Hole Race Junior DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 283 FLAG RACE CLASS 1 Flag Race Senior CLASS 2 Flag Race Intermediate CLASS 3 Flag Race Junior

POULTRY GENERAL RULES – POULTRY 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - An exhibitor is limited to a TOTAL of 12 individual birds, 2 trios or production pens of three, and 1 broiler pen of three (as part of

the Johnson County Market Broiler Project). The following maximums per division are in place: • 6 birds in the large fowl division • 6 birds in the bantam division • 1 Trio (1 male and 2 females)** • 4 birds in the duck division • 2 birds in the goose division • 2 birds in the turkey division • 4 birds in the game bird, etc. division • 1 broiler pen of three** • 1 production pen of three** * * Birds in a Broiler Pen of 3, Production Pen of 3, or Trio may NOT be shown individually in other classes, except for showmanship.

3. IDENTIFICATION - 4-H members may identify a maximum of 24 birds by documenting their species, breed, sex, and age on a Johnson County 4-H Poultry Ownership Affidavit. Affidavits must be completed and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15.

4. PRE-ENTRY - All poultry exhibits, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July15. All poultry exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS - A health certificate is not required. All poultry for exhibition shall be free of parasites and show no signs of disease during exhibition. Poultry exhibits may be tested by the Nebraska Department of Agriculture for Avian Influenza (AI) sometime during the Johnson County Fair. See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS.

6. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS.

17

7. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 8. CARE REQUIREMENTS - All poultry require food and water at all times. The 4-H member is responsible for their care. The poultry

superintendent and/or overall livestock superintendent has the right to dismiss an exhibitor’s exhibits if proper care is neglected. 9. BREEDS - To be eligible for exhibition the entry (cockerel, pullet, cock or hen) must be a fair representative of one of the breeds listed in the

American Standards of Perfection. 10. BANTAMS & OTHER POULTRY - The rules for standard size chickens apply equally to bantams, waterfowl and turkey where applicable. 11. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION - No overall grand champion and reserve grand champion will be selected from the poultry divisions. 12. PRESENCE DURING JUDGING – Each 4-H exhibitor MUST be present at the exhibit area during judging, unless excused by the area or

overall superintendent or UNL Extension Staff. If the participant or a substitute showman approved by the superintendent is not present and not excused, the exhibit will not be judged.

POULTRY SHOWMANSHIP RULES 1. GENERAL RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES 2. BIRD SELECTION - Participants may use any bird they so choose, so long as it was raised and trained by the 4-H member. Birds used for the

showmanship class MUST be also entered in the live show. 3. BASIS FOR JUDGING - Showmanship is based on grooming and training of the bird and the appearance and behavior of the exhibitor. The

exhibitor must vocally explain the steps in their routine and the merit of the bird. Primarily showmanship is the skill of the exhibitor in presenting and explaining the bird before the judge. The excellence of the bird is not considered in scoring.

4. QUESTIONS - The judge may or may not ask questions of the exhibitor at the close of the routine. 5. TIME LIMIT - The maximum length of a showmanship presentation is four minutes. Exhibitors will be timed. 6. RESOURCES - Information on poultry showmanship is found in “Selecting and Grooming 4-H Exhibition Poultry” (4-H 191) and online at the

UNL Companion Animal YouTube channel: http://www.youtube.com/user/companionanimals?feature=watch

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 POULTRY SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 23 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 22 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 21 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

CHICKEN RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – POULTRY 2. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Chicken. 3. CLASSES – The American Standard of Perfection classes for large fowl and bantams will be used. Cockerels, pullet, cocks and hens will show

together. PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 LARGE FOWL CLASS 2 American (Plymouth Rock, Jersey Giant, Wyandotte, New Hampshire Red, Rhode Island Red) CLASS 3 Asiatic (Cochin, Brahmas, Langshan) CLASS 4 English (Cornish, Orpington, Australorps, Sussex, Dorklings) CLASS 5 Mediterranean (Leghorn, Buttercup, Minorca) CLASS 6 Continental (Polish, Hamburg, Campines, Faverolles) CLASS 7 All other breeds (Houdan, Game, Sumatra, Araucanas, Ameracanas) DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 BANTAMS CLASS 8 Game Bantam (Modern and Old English) CLASS 9 Single Comb Clean Legged (Plymouth Rock, Leghorn, Japanese, Rhode Island Red, Orpington, New Hampshire) CLASS 10 Rose Comb Clean Legged (Rosecomb, Wyandotte, Sebright, Leghorn) CLASS 11 All Other Comb Clean Legged (Polish, Cornish, Houdan) CLASS 12 Feather Legged Class (Silky, Cochin, Brahma, MilleFleur, Frizzle)

WATERFOWL, TURKEY & GAME BIRD RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – POULTRY 2. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Other Poultry. 3. CLASSES – The American Standard of Perfection classes for ducks will be used. All geese will be in one class and turkeys will be in one class.

Males and females will show together. PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 DUCKS CLASS 13 Heavy (Pekin, Rouen, Muskovy) CLASS 14 Medium (Swedish, Buff, Crested, Cayuga) CLASS 15 Light (Runner, Khaki, Campbell) CLASS 16 Bantam (Call, Mallard, East India) DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 GEESE & TURKEYS CLASS 17 Goose (All weights) CLASS 18 Turkeys (All weights) DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 GAME BIRDS CLASS 20 Quail (Japanese or coturnix quail)

PRODUCTION PEN OF THREE & TRIO RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – POULTRY 2. INDIVIDUAL ENTRY – Birds in these classes may NOT be shown individually in other classes, except for showmanship. 3. PRODUCTION PEN OF THREE – A production pen of three shall consist of 3 sexually mature females. Birds may be hybrids, crossbred or

purebred. Egg production females will be judged for production qualities only and not necessarily conform to breed standards. 4. TRIO – A trio consists of 1 male and 2 female birds of the same large fowl or bantam breed. 5. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – A Champion and Reserve Champion Production Pen of Three and a Champion and Reserve

Champion Trio will be selected.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 PENS OF 3 PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00

18

CLASS 19 Production Pen of 3 CLASS 910 Trio (1 male and 2 females)

JOHNSON COUNTY 4-H MARKET BROILER PROJECT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – POULTRY 2. PROJECT ENROLLMENT – 4-H members wishing to participate in the Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project must sign up with the

Johnson County Extension Office by closing on June 1. Exhibitors will receive the chicks approximately six to eight weeks prior to the Johnson County Fair.

3. PRE-ENTRY – Exhibitors must enter poultry showmanship, broiler record book, and market broiler pen of thee classes on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair.

4. INTERVIEW (Q&A) – Exhibitors participating in the Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project must participate in the Market Broiler Interview class during the 4-H Poultry Show at the Johnson County Fair. The class will consist of a two-minute question and answer time where exhibitors will be asked questions about broiler production and their broiler project experience. The Interview class will be held during the Poultry Showmanship portion of the Poultry Show.

5. RECORD BOOKS – All exhibitors in the Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project must complete a market broiler record book and submit it at the time of market broiler weigh-in.

6. PEN OF THREE – Exhibitors are also required to exhibit market broiler pen of three during the Johnson County Fair. Only exhibitors who are participating in the Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project are eligible to show in this class. A market broiler pen of three is considered one unit and is eligible for the premium sale.

7. RIBBONS – Exhibitors will receive ribbons for showmanship, record book, and pen of three classes. 8. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – A Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project Champion and Reserve Champion will be selected for

the Junior Division (ages 8 to 11 as of December 31st of the preceding year) and Senior Division (ages 12 and up as of December 31st of the preceding year). Selection will be based on points awarded for interview, record books, and market broiler pen of three. A participant’s score from the broiler interview and record books will be added along with a score for market broiler pen of three. Points for market broiler live placing will be awarded as follows:

• White ribbon = 60 point • Red ribbon = 70 points • Blue ribbon = 80 points • Purple ribbon = 90 points • Second purple ribbon = 5 extra point • First purple ribbon = 10 extra points

9. PENALTIES – 4-H members who sign up for the Johnson County 4-H Market Broiler Project and fail to participate in the broiler interview, complete a record book and/or exhibit a pen of three at the Johnson County Fair will be billed $30 for the cost of the market broilers received.

10. PREMIUM SALE – The minimum average weight for a Market Broiler Pen of Three to be eligible for the 4-H Premium Sale is 3.75 lbs. (See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES & REQUIREMENTS)

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 70 MARKET BROILER PROJECT PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 920 CLASS 930 CLASS 940 CLASS 950

Market Broilers Pen of 3 – Live Placing Market Broiler Record Book Market Broiler Interview – Junior Market Broiler Interview – Senior

(Ages 8 to 11) (Ages 12 and up)

RABBITS GENERAL RULES – RABBITS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 2. ENTRY LIMIT –

• An exhibitor is limited to a total of 8 rabbits (showmanship does not count as an entry). • An individual rabbit may only be shown in one class. • Rabbits may not be exhibited in a fancy breed class and a commercial class. • Rabbits entered in the 4-H Companion Animal Show are not allowed to be entered in the Johnson County Fair 4-H Rabbit Show.

3. IDENTIFICATION – All rabbits except fryers must have a permanent and legible tattoo in either ear (permanent marker numbers written in the ears of rabbits are not considered permanent ID numbers). Tattoo equipment is available for check out from the Johnson County Extension Office. Fryers are too young to be tattooed by June 15; however they do need to be identified on an affidavit. The animal’s breed, sex, age, and identification number must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Rabbit Identification Affidavit. Affidavits must be completed and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on June 15.

4. PRE-ENTRY - All rabbit exhibits, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All rabbit exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS - All rabbits shall be free of and show no symptoms of disease during exhibition. Rabbits shall be free of parasites and mites (i.e. ear mites, fleas, etc.) See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS.

6. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 7. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS. 8. CARE REQUIREMENTS - All rabbits require food and water at all times. The 4-H member is responsible for their care. The rabbit

superintendent and/or overall livestock superintendent has the right to dismiss an exhibitor’s exhibits if proper care is neglected. 9. PRESENCE DURING JUDGING – Each 4-H exhibitor MUST be present at the exhibit area during judging, unless excused by the area or

overall superintendent or UNL Extension Staff. If the participant or a substitute showman approved by the superintendent is not present and not excused, the exhibit will not be judged.

RABBIT SHOWMANSHIP RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES 2. RABBIT SELECTION - Participants may use any rabbit they so choose, so long as it was raised and trained by the 4-H member. 3. BASIS FOR JUDGING – Showmanship is based on grooming and training of the rabbit and the appearance and behavior of the exhibitor. The

exhibitor must vocally explain the steps in their routine and the merit of the rabbit. Primarily showmanship is the skill of the exhibitor in presenting and explaining the rabbit before the judge. The excellence of the rabbit is not considered in scoring.

4. QUESTIONS – The judge may or may not ask questions of the exhibitor at the close of the routine.

19

5. TIME LIMIT – The maximum length of a showmanship presentation is four minutes. Exhibitors will be timed. 6. RESOURCES – Online at the UNL Companion Animal YouTube channel: http://www.youtube.com/user/companionanimals?feature=watch

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 80 RABBIT SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 72 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 71 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 70 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

MARKET RABBIT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – RABBITS 2. WEIGHT ELIGIBILITY – Minimum and maximum weight requirements are stated for each class. Animals not meeting these requirements will be

automatically dropped a ribbon placing and will not be allowed to be sold at the Premium Sale. 3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Market Rabbit. 4. CLASSES – Market class breaks will be determined by weight. Market rabbits will be judged from lightest to heaviest. Does and bucks will

show together. All breeds will be shown together. Market rabbit classes will be divided into division if there are more than 30 market rabbits pre-entered.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 80 MARKET RABBITS PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 2 Single Fryer Not over 10 weeks of age, Minimum weight 3 lbs., Maximum weight 5 lbs. CLASS 3 Meat Pen of Three Age limit 10 weeks of age, Minimum weight 3 lbs. each, Maximum weight 5 lbs. each CLASS 4 Roaster Must be under 6 months of age, Minimum weight 8 lbs.

BREEDING RABBIT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – RABBITS 2. CLASSIFICATION – Breed, division and class should be indicated on the Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form. Rabbits without

true breed characteristics must enter as commercial crossbred Class or may enter the 4-H Companion Animal Show. 3. JUDGING STANDARDS – Rabbits in this show will NOT be judged according to the American Rabbit Breed Standards. However, breeding rabbits

will be judged on the basis of vigor, health, conformation and suitability as breeding stock. 4. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Breeding Rabbit. 5. CLASSES – Fancy breeds will be shown together and commercial breeds will be shown together.

Fancy Breeds Commercial Breeds American Fuzzy Lop American Sable Belgian Hare Britannia Petite Dutch Dwarf Hotot English Angora English Spot Florida White French Angora Harlequin Havana Himalayan Holland Lop

Jersey Wollie Lilac

Mini Lop Mini Rex Mini Satin

Netherland Dwarf Polish Rex

Rhinelander Satin Angora

Silver Silver Marten

Standard Chinchilla Tan

Thrianta

American American Chinchilla

Beveren Blanc D’ Hotot

Californian Champagne D’ Argent

Checkered Giant Cinnamon

Crème D’ Argent

English Lop Flemish Giant French Lop

Giant Angora Giant Chinchilla

New Zealand Palomino

Satin Silver Fox

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 80 BREEDING RABBITS PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 910 Junior Doe – Fancy Breed Under 6 months of age CLASS 915 Junior Buck – Fancy Breed Under 6 months of age CLASS 920 Senior Doe – Fancy Breed 6 months of age and over CLASS 925 Senior Buck – Fancy Breed 6 months of age and over CLASS 930 Junior Doe – Commercial Breed Under 6 months of age CLASS 935 Junior Buck – Commercial Breed Under 6 months of age CLASS 940 Intermediate Doe – Commercial Breed 6 to 8 months of age CLASS 945 Intermediate Buck – Commercial Breed 6 to 8 months of age CLASS 950 Senior Doe – Commercial Breed Over 8 months of age CLASS 955 Senior Buck – Commercial Breed Over 8 months of age

SHEEP GENERAL RULES – SHEEP 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 2. ENTRY LIMIT – An exhibitor is limited to 6 market lambs and 6 breeding ewes. Showmanship and Pen of Three do not count as an entry. 3. IDENTIFICATION –

MARKET LAMBS – In order to show at the Johnson County Fair, Nebraska State Fair, or Ak-Sar-Ben stock show, all market lambs must be ear tagged with the official 4-H ear tag. A DNA sample must be taken for any market lambs to be eligible to be exhibited at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show. Market lamb ear tagging and DNA collection must be completed prior to June 15. All identification for market lambs for the Johnson County Fair must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Market Lamb Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements. BREEDING EWES – All breeding ewes must be ear tagged with an official 4-H ear tag or tattooed with an identification number unique to that animal. All identification for breeding ewes for the Johnson County Fair must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Breeding Ewe Ownership Affidavit and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. In order to show at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show animals must be identified with the tag/tattoo required by the various national sheep breed associations. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements.

20

4. SCRAPIES TAGS – ALL sheep being exhibited must be tagged with an official USDA-approved ear tag. This tag is in addition to the official 4-H ear tag. Tags cannot be shared with other exhibitors; each family must have their own tag.

5. PRE-ENTRY - All sheep exhibits (market & breeding), including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All sheep exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

6. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 7. DRESS CODE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS 9. GROOMING RULES - See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REGULATIONS

SHEEP SHOWMANSHIP RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES 2. OBJECTIONABLE AND ABUSIVE PRACTICES – The use of showing and/or handling practices that may be considered objectionable or

abusive, such as striking or slapping lambs and exhibiting the lamb with its feet off the ground, are note acceptable. Exhibitors displaying such practices will be given one warning. A second offense may result in the lowering of ribbon placing or the forfeit of class premiums.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 103 SHEEP SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

MARKET LAMB RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SHEEP 2. ELIGIBILITY – All market lambs (ewes and wethers) must be born after January 1 of the current calendar year. 3. WEIGHT ELIGIBILITY – Lambs weighing less than 80 lbs. will show in the feeder lamb class and will not be eligible to compete for Grand

Champion Market Lamb. 4. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Grand Champion

and Reserve Grand Champion Market Lamb. 5. CLASSES – Market class breaks will be determined by weight. Market lambs will be judged from lightest to heaviest. Ewes and wethers will

show together (short scrotum, cryptorchid or ram lambs are not eligible as market lambs). All breeds will be shown together. Market lamb classes will be divided into division if there are more than 30 market lambs pre-entered.

6. PEN OF THREE MARKET LAMBS – Group of 3 market lambs with ownership by one individual or one family unit, all animals must have been identified on a single affidavit under all eligible 4-H member’s names. The premium for this class will be split among exhibitors with lambs in the pen of three.

DEPARTMENT G

DIVISION 31

MARKET LAMBS

PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 910 Feeder Lambs 79 lbs or under CLASS 920 Market Lamb 80 lbs and over CLASS 930 Market Lamb Pen of Three

BREEDING EWE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SHEEP 2. CLASSIFICATION – Ewes born January 1 or after of the current year are classified as lambs. Ewes born during the preceding year are

classified as yearlings. Crossbred ewes from meat breeds (including Suffolk, Hampshire, Dorset, Shropshire, Southdown, and Montedale) will be shown in the commercial division.

3. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and Reserve Champion Breeding Ewe.

4. CLASSES – All registered and commercial wool breeds will be shown together. All registered and commercial meat breeds will be shown together. Any breed having less than five head checked in may be allowed only one class for all animals at the discretion of the sheep superintendent. Animals will enter the ring at the same time in order of age and be placed in ribbon groups according to their individual merit.

5. GROOMING REQUIREMENTS – MEAT BREEDS – All “meat breed” breeding ewes must be slick shorn within 10 days of the show. WOOL BREEDS – All “wool breed” breeding ewes should be shown in fleece.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 32 BREEDING EWES PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 910 Lamb Ewe (Born March – May, this year) CLASS 920 Lamb Ewe (Born January – February, this year) CLASS 930 Lamb Ewe (Born Fall of last year) CLASS 940 Yearling Ewe (Born March – May, last year) CLASS 950 Yearling Ewe (Born January – February, last year) CLASS 960 Yearling Ewe (Born Fall 2 years ago) CLASS 970 Aged Ewe (2 years old & older)

SWINE GENERAL RULES – SWINE 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - An exhibitor is limited to 4 market hogs. Showmanship and Pen of Three do not count as an entry.

IDENTIFICATION - All market swine must be ear tagged with an official 4-H ear tag in order to show at the Johnson County Fair. Ear tags may be picked up at the Extension Office. In order to show at the Nebraska State Fair or Ak-Sar-Ben stock show market hogs must be ear notched in both ears using the universal notching system. A DNA sample must be taken for any market hogs to be eligible to be exhibited at the Nebraska State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show. Market hog ear tagging and DNA collection must be completed prior to June 15. All identification for market hogs for the Johnson County Fair must be documented on a Nebraska 4-H Market Swine Ownership Affidavit (4-H F107) and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 15. The color markings of hogs must be documented on the affidavit as a description. The

21

description of “crossbred” is unacceptable. Please contact the Johnson County Extension Office for State Fair and Ak-Sar-Ben stock show entry requirements.

3. PRE-ENTRY- All swine exhibits, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry From to be eligible to show at the Johnson County Fair. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15. All swine exhibitors must complete and submit a Johnson County Fair Stall Request Form indicating the number of exhibits being brought to the fair. Stall request forms must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on the Wednesday before Fair Clean Up Day.

4. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 5. DRESS CODE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 7. GROOMING RULES - Swine must be shown without hairdressing compounds (including: oil, power, or any other coat dressing compound).

Only unadulterated water is permitted. Pigs found in violation will be disqualified. See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS.

SWINE SHOWMANSHIP RULES See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 35 SWINE SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

MARKET SWINE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SWINE 2. NON-TERMINAL SHOW – The Johnson County 4-H Swine Show is a non-terminal show. Swine exhibitors who intend to slaughter their own

animals and/or take their animals home must complete a Johnson County Fair Swine Release Form prior to release time. 3. WEIGHT ELIGIBILITY – All market swine, regardless of breed, will be classified for judging purposes on the basis of weight alone. Pigs under

200 lbs. and over 320 lbs. will be allowed to show; but will not be eligible to compete for division awards or Grand Champion Market Swine. 4. CHAMPION AND RESERVE CHAMPION – Animals receiving first and second purple places from each class will compete for Champion and

Reserve Champion Market Swine in their respective divisions. A Grand Champion and Reserve Grand Champion will be selected from the division champions and reserve champions.

5. CLASSES – Market class breaks will be determined by weight. Market hogs will be judged from lightest to heaviest. Barrows and gilts will be shown together. All breeds will be shown together. Market swine classes will be divided into divisions if there are more than 30 market hogs pre-entered.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 35 MARKET SWINE PREMIUM Purple $6.00 Blue $5.00 Red $4.00 White $3.00 CLASS 950 Pre-Market Swine 199 lbs. or less CLASS 960 Market Swine 200 lbs. to 320 lbs. CLASS 970 Heavyweight Swine 321 lbs. or more CLASS 980 Market Swine Pen of Three

1

COMPANION ANIMALS GENERAL RULES – CAGED PETS & BIRDS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMITS - Each exhibitor may make 4 entries in each class not to exceed a maximum of 8 entries in this division. All animals must be

weaned prior to the show. 3. IDENTIFICATION - Animals must be identified on a 4-H Companion Animal Ownership/Identification Affidavit. Affidavits must be completed and

submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1. 4. PRE-ENTRY - All companion animal exhibits must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show

at the companion animal show. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 1. 5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS - All pets shall be free of parasites and show no signs of disease. Ferrets must be vaccinated for rabies and have a

completed health form signed by the administering veterinarian. Health forms must be submitted with the pre-entry form. 6. JUDGING - Exhibitors must be present at the time of judging and will be interviewed by the judge. Exhibits will be judged primarily on the overall

health and appearance of the animal, and the exhibitor’s presentation and knowledge of the animal. Animals will not be judged according to breed standards.

7. HOUSING - Animals must be housed in a cage at all times during the show, unless asked by the judge to remove them. 8. SHOWMANSHIP – Each exhibitor will be asked to give a short “showmanship” presentation on their animal. Their animal’s characteristics,

health, and care should be covered in this presentation. Following the presentation, exhibitors will be interviewed on knowledge of their animal and its care.

9. MOST CAPTIVATING PET - All pets will be automatically entered in this just for fun class. A Champion and Reserve Champion Most Captivating Pet will be selected.

10. POSTER CLASS – • Posters will be judged at the Companion Animal Show. • Entries can cover any companion animal. • Posters should include information on the proper care of a companion animal that they are not showing in another class of the

Companion Animal Show. • Posters should be the size of one full sheet of standard board poster and should not exceed 22” x 28”. • Exhibitors must be present at the time of judging. • Exhibitors will be judged on quality of the poster, accuracy of the information provided, and ability of the exhibitor to explain the

information and answer the judge’s questions.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 100 COMPANION ANIMALS PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 2 Pet Rabbit (Minimum age 7 weeks) CLASS 3 Ferret (Minimum age 4 months) CLASS 4 Chinchilla (Minimum age 7 weeks) CLASS 5 Guinea Pig (Minimum age 4 weeks) CLASS 6 Gerbil (Minimum age 4 weeks) CLASS 7 Hamster (Minimum age 4 weeks) CLASS 8 Mouse (Minimum age 4 weeks)

22

CLASS 9 Rat (Minimum age 4 weeks) CLASS 10 Hedgehog (Minimum age 5 weeks) CLASS 950 Parakeets and Canaries CLASS 960 Tropical Birds CLASS 970 Reptiles and Amphibians CLASS 980 Tropical Fish and Goldfish CLASS 990 Other Pets CLASS 11 Poster

GENERAL RULES – CAT 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMITS - Each exhibitor may enter no more than 4 cats in the show. Cats must be a minimum of 4 months old. 3. IDENTIFICATION - Animals must be identified on a 4-H Companion Animal Ownership/Identification Affidavit with a photograph. Affidavits must

be completed and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1. Additionally, an immunization record must be submitted for each cat to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1 or they will not be allowed to show.

4. PRE-ENTRY – All cat entries, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show at the companion animal show. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on June 1.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS – • All cats must be free of fleas, ticks, ear mites, ringworm, and any internal or external parasites and infectious diseases. If a cat shows the

possibility of being contagious, it will be considered a danger to the other cats and will not be allowed to show. Cats that pose a danger to others will not be allowed to enter the building.

• PROOF OF VACCINATION MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE SHOW OR THE ANIMAL WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO SHOW. One of the following is required as proof of vaccination: a veterinary health certificate with a veterinarian’s signature or a vaccination printout or vaccination receipt from a vet clinic.

• Cats are required to be current on the following vaccinations: rabies, panleukopenia, viral rhinotracheitis, and calicivirus. Cats must have a current feline leukemia vaccination or proof of a negative test within 180 days of the show.

• Proof of vaccinations must be sent in with the identification affidavit and pre-entry form. Participants should have their veterinarian fill out and sign the “Nebraska State Fair Cat/Ferret Vaccination Record Form.” Exhibitors will not be allowed to show without a veterinarian signed vaccination form.

• 4-H members vaccinating their own cats must provide proof in the form of a statement from their veterinarian or by turning in the serum containers. A rabies vaccination is federally mandated to be given by a licensed veterinarian only. This vaccination must be current and printed on a vet clinic report.

• If a cat is not declawed, the claws must be clipped. • No expectant or nursing mother cats may enter. • ANY CAT NOT MEETING THE HEALTH REQUIREMENTS WILL NOT BE JUDGED AND WILL BE ASKED TO LEAVE THE SHOW.

6. SHOW PROCEDURE – • Exhibitors must be present at the time of showing. • Animals must be housed in a cage at all times during the show unless asked to remove them by the judge. • Each exhibitor will be asked to give a short “showmanship” presentation on their cat. The characteristics, health, and care of the animal

should be covered in the presentation. Following the presentation, exhibitors will be interviewed on their knowledge of their cat and its care.

• The judge will evaluate the participant on the following basis (see Nebraska 4-H Companion Animal Judging Sheet (SF 73)): § Animal health and wellbeing 35 points § Cage evaluation (appropriateness of travel housing as well as description of everyday housing) 25 points § Overall knowledge and presentation skills 40 points

7. SHOWMANSHIP – Exhibitors will be judged on handling of cat from cage to judge’s table, plus answers to questions as to breed, age, type and date of immunizations, sex, and general cat knowledge.

8. CAGES & CARE – • Cats will be brought to the show in a secure container, preferably a cat carrier with no more than 2 cats per container. • Cats will not be allowed out of the container unless held by the exhibitor. • The exhibitor should have on hand: food, water, litter, a comfortable cage bottom, and non-see through cage covering (2-3 bath towels or

a sheet will suffice). • Judging criteria will be based on the animal’s comfort and efficient use of the space provided. Cages will be judged for the availability of

food, water, and litter as well as cage comfort, and cage covering on. 9. BEST PERSONALITY AND MOST SPIRITED - All cats will be automatically entered in these just for fun classes. A Champion and Reserve

Champion Best Personality and a Champion and Reserve Champion Most Spirited will be chosen.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 100 CAT SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 100 COMPANION ANIMALS PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Cat (Minimum 4 months of age)

DOGS GENERAL RULES – DOGS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES & REQUIREMENTS 2. ENTRY LIMIT - An exhibitor may enter no more than three dogs. A dog can be entered in only one obedience class. Two dogs per exhibitor are

allowed in obedience and must be in different classes. A 4-H member can be entered in only one showmanship class. For County Show – A dog may re-enter the ring with a different (family member) handler in the showmanship class.

3. IDENTIFICATION - Animals must be identified on a 4-H Companion Animal Ownership/Identification Affidavit with a photograph. Affidavits must be completed and submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1. Additionally, an immunization record must be submitted for each dog to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on May 1 or they will not be allowed to show.

23

4. PRE-ENTRY - All dog entries, including showmanship must be entered on a Johnson County Fair Large & Small Animal Entry Form to be eligible to show at the dog show. This form must be completed and submitted to the Extension Office by closing on July 15.

5. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS - All dogs must be free of fleas, ticks, ear mites, ringworms other parasites and infectious diseases or they will not be permitted to show. All shots/vaccinations must be given at least 1 month in advance of the shows or clinics for the protection of other animals and children. Immunization can be effective within an animal in a month’s time. PROOF OF VACCINATION MUST BE MUST BE FILLED OUT ON FORM SF263 AND SIGNED BY A VETERINARIAN AND TURNED IN TO THE EXTENSION OFFICE NO LATER THAN MAY 1. SHOW AGE OF DOGS IS 6 MONTHS OR OLDER. The following are diseases that dogs must be vaccinated against: distemper, hepatitis, parvo and rabies. The Nebraska State Fair Certificate of Vaccination for Dogs must document the vaccinations within 1 year or 3 years for rabies and all other vaccinations within 12 months. All vaccinations must be in effect at the time of the dog show.

6. SHOWMANSHIP CLASSES - Each class will be judged on handler’s appearance (10%), grooming and conditioning of dog (20%), handling-showing of dog (50%) and general knowledge (20%). See GENERAL ANIMAL SHOWMANSHIP RULES for more information.

7. ADVANCEMENT IN OBEDIENCE CLASSES – The following definitions and rules apply to advancement in obedience classes: • Experienced handlers are those showing for the second year or more at any dog show, including AKC, fun matches, etc. • Handlers and beginning dogs may show only one year in Division A. Then they must advance to Division B. If continuing as a team, both must

advance to Division B. • A youth will move up to a ‘transition year’, after they receive 2 purples in a specific class at county or state level competition. Youth will finish their 4-

H year at the same level if the second purple ribbon occurs in the middle of their 4-H year. Youth do not have to move up in the middle of a 4-H year. Youth will then have the option to stay in their current class for one additional year (after receiving 2 purple ribbons) called the ‘transition year’. During the transition year, youth will practice the more advanced class (gaining skills such as off leash work) but may compete in their same level. Youth may advance up to the next level more quickly with advice/assistance from a leader and parent to help evaluate skills and readiness of youth and dog. This may especially occur if the youth has had previous dog handling experiences.

• Dogs with AKC degrees will show as follows: “CD” degree must show in Graduate Novice or higher; “CDX” or “UD” degree must show in Utility. • The dog will stay in its highest attained class. A ‘new’ handler will enter such class. • There is no limit on the number of years a dog may be shown in the Utility class. • Exhibitors enter equal to or above the class level of participation at County Fair from the last calendar year.

8. ADVANCEMENT IN AGILITY CLASSES - Follow rules in Nebraska 4-H Dog Show Guidelines 4-H 420. A youth will move up to a ‘transition year’, after they receive 2 purples in a specific class at county or state level competition. Youth will finish their 4-H year at the same level if the second purple ribbon occurs in the middle of their 4-H year. Youth do not have to move up in the middle of a 4-H year. Youth will then have the option to stay in their current class for one additional year (after receiving 2 purple ribbons) called the ‘transition year’. During the transition year, youth will practice the more advanced class (gaining skills such as off leash work) but may compete in their same level. Youth may advance up to the next level more quickly with advice/assistance from a leader and parent to help evaluate skill and readiness of youth and dog. This may especially occur if the youth has had previous dog handling experiences.

9. DRESS CODE – See GENERAL ANIMAL RULES AND REQUIRMENTS 10. AGE OF DOG – A dog must be 6 months or older. 11. DISQUALIFIED DOGS - Females in season will not be permitted to be shown. Overly aggressive dogs may be disqualified at the discretion of the

extension staff, judge or superintendent. Lame or crippled dogs will not be permitted to show if it is determined by a show superintendent that it is affecting the health of the dog.

12. BAITING – Baiting with food or a toy is not permitted and is cause for disqualification. Handlers may use baiting action without food or toys. The judge has the authority to disqualify violators.

13. EXHIBITOR’S RESPONSIBILITY – Dogs are not allowed on the floor except while in the show ring. CLEANUP shall be the EXHIBITOR’S RESPONSIBILITY. Non-entered dogs and puppies are not allowed at the show.

14. GROOMING – Only exhibitors are allowed to groom or work dogs at the show, both in and out of the ring. 15. JUDGING – Procedures described in Nebraska 4-H Dog Show Guidelines (4-H 420) will be followed. 16. SUBSITUTIONS - A dog may be substituted for showmanship classes only if it is injured or dies following the entry deadline. Substitutions are

generally not allowed in obedience and agility classes; however, substitutions may be considered at the discretion of the dog superintendent. A substitute can be selected from the exhibitor’s household family or from the household where the originally entered dog resides. Dog(s) may be substituted only if the Extension Office is directly consulted prior to the show date. A Nebraska State Fair Dog Show Vaccination Form (SF 263) must be completed for all substitution dogs and received by the Extension Office prior to the show date.

17. WORKING & TRICKS - This class is just for fun and will award a champion and reserve champion. Sign-up for this class is optional. The dog performs tricks that it has been trained to do, such as: sit up, roll over, retrieve, etc. Treats may be used in this class.

18. BEGINNING NOVICE LEVEL - Obedience classes in both the A and B division of Beginning Novice: all exercises to be performed on a 6 foot leash. Dogs must heel including figure 8; come on recall; stand for examination; long sit for one minute and long down for three minutes. The leash may lie on the floor in front of the dog or be held by the handler.

19. AGILITY PROCEDURE - Agility will follow those procedures and classes described in Nebraska 4-H Dog Show Guidelines. Refer to Nebraska 4-H Dog Show Guidelines to determine class entry. Wither heights of all agility dogs must be included with advanced entries. Level 1 & 2 Agility classes are run on leash. Level 3, 4, and 5 are all run off leash. One of each obstacle noted in each level are mandatory and duplicate obstacles may be added to make up quantities of obstacles in each level. Obstacle equipment needing repair or deemed unsafe by judge will be excluded from the competition. Judges determine the arrangements of the obstacles on the course. Obstacles in course should be numbered to note the obstacle order for the course. Course maps will be made available and posted at time of show registration in designated area(s). Level 5 – youth can use additional equipment for competition that they have access to and can use in practice. Obstacles that are used for agility competition events may be included from (AKC, CPE, USDAA, NADAC, UKC, etc….) Agility Jump heights – measure dogs at withers to determine jump height:

Dogs 11 inches or less – 4 inches, Dogs over 11 inches up to and including 14 inches – 8 inches, Dogs over 14 inches up to and including 18 inches – 12 inches, Dogs over 18 inches – 16 inches.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 700 DOG SHOWMANSHIP PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 910 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 920 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 930 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 701 DOG OBEDIENCE CLASS 10 Beginning Novice Division A Exhibitor and dog in first year of competition CLASS 20 Beginning Novice Division B Exhibitor or dog that is beyond its first year of competition

24

CLASS 30 Novice Dogs must heel on leash including figure 8; stand for examination off leash, heel free; come on recall off leash, long sit for one minute off leash and long down for three minutes off leash

CLASS 40 Graduate Novice Dogs must heel on leash; stand for examination off leash; heel free including figure 8; drop on recall; long sit for three minutes and long down for five minutes both with handler out of sight

CLASS 45 Advanced Graduate Novice Heel on leash and figure 8 (off leash); drop on recall; dumbbell recall; recall over high jump; recall over broad jump; and long down

CLASS 50 Open All exercises off leash. Heel free and figure 8; drop on recall; retrieve on flat; retrieve over high jump; broad jump; long sit for three minutes and long down for five minutes, both with handler out of sight.

CLASS 55 Graduate Open Signal exercise, sent discrimination, directed retrieve, moving stand and examination, go out, and directed jumping

CLASS 60 Utility The dog will perform five exercises – the signal exercise; the scent discrimination exercise with leather and metal objects; the directed retrieve; moving stand and examination; directed jumping. Exhibitors must supply their own scent articles and gloves for the directed retrieve.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 702 DOG AGILITY CLASS 10 Level 1 6 obstacles – 3 bar jumps which have two bars each, short dog walk, pause box or table, and tunnel (open). CLASS 20 Level 2 10 obstacles – several bar jumps which have two bars each, short dog

walk, pause box or table, tunnel (open), chute (collapsed or closed tunnel), solid panel jump and tire jump (hoop jump).

CLASS 30 Level 3 10 obstacles – same obstacles as Level 2 but dogs run off leash for Level 3. CLASS 40 Level 4 13 obstacles – bar jump which has one bar each, bar jump which has two bars each, tall dog walk, pause box or

table, tunnel (open), chute (collapsed or closed tunnel), solid panel jump, teeter totter (seesaw), weave poles (single set with 6 poles), and tire jump (hoop jump).

CLASS 50 Level 5 15 – 20 of any of the following obstacles such as: bar jump which has one bar each, bar jump which has two bars each, tall dog walk, pause box or table, tunnel (open), chute (collapsed or closed tunnel), solid panel jump, A-frame short, A-frame tall, teeter totter (seesaw), weave poles (single set with 6 poles), weave poles (double set with 12 poles),and tire jump (hoop jump) broad jump, dump jump, triple bar jump, swing bridge, crawl, etc…. . Number of obstacles used for a course will depend on ring size and available equipment at show site. Course layout may include more advanced handling techniques.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 703 DOG RALLY CLASS 10 Beginning Dog is on leash and there are 5 to 10 stations. The beginning Rally signs that are suggested include: halt sit, halt

down dog, right turn, left turn, about turn right, slow pace, fast pace, and normal pace. These are the same commands that exhibitors use in beginning novice obedience levels.

CLASS 11 Rally 1 Dog is on leash and there are 10 to 15 stations. CLASS 12 Rally 2 Dog is on leash and there are 12 to 17 stations. CLASS 13 Rally 3 Dog is off leash and there are 15 to 20 stations.

NOTE: Although every course will have many of the same exercises, the sequence of those exercises in the course design may carry. As levels go up the difficulty of the exercises goes up in ordinary obedience. The rally classes will follow the AKC rules for the same levels. The signs and rules are available online at the AKC’s website (http://www.akc.org/events/rally/resources/). A difference between rally and regular obedience is that you may talk to your dog as much as you want to guide and instruct them.

ANIMAL SCIENCE ANIMAL SCIENCE STATIC EXHIBITS RULES

1. PURPOSE – The purpose of Animal Science exhibit is to inform the public about an animal husbandry or production topic related to a specific 4-H animal project area. Appropriate topics include, but are not limited to: nutrition, reproduction, physiology, quality assurance, etc.

2. EXHIBITS – An Animal Science exhibit may consist of a poster or display. The exhibit may represent materials from any of the animal project manuals. All reference materials need to be properly cited. Exhibits lacking proper citation will be lowered a ribbon placing. Posters • This exhibit should present the viewer with a design that id simple and direct, unlike a display that usually presents more information. • A poster should not exceed 22” x 28” and may be either vertical or horizontal. Displays • A display may include but is not limited to: a three dimensional exhibit, a scale model, the actual product (example: skeleton; teeth; samples

of leather, fur, etc.) or a notebook. • A display is not a poster. • A display may be mounted on poster board not to exceed 22” x 28” or on ¼” plywood or equivalent that does not exceed 24” high or 32”

wide. 3. PHOTOGRAPHS – If photographs are to be part of the exhibit, remember the public will view them. Make sure that the photographs are in good

taste and not offensive to anyone. 4. REFERENCES – Since these are science displays, all references and information must be properly cited. 5. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the animal science division. 6. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISON 999 ANIMAL SCIENCE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 905 Beef Cattle Poster or Display CLASS 910 Bucket Calf Poster or Display CLASS 915 Dairy Cattle Poster or Display CLASS 920 Goat Poster or Display CLASS 925 Horse Poster or Display

25

CLASS 930 Poultry Poster or Display CLASS 935 Rabbit Poster or Display CLASS 940 Sheep Poster or Display CLASS 945 Swine Poster or Display CLASS 950 Companion Animal Poster or Display CLASS 955 Cat Poster or Display CLASS 960 Dog Poster or Display

COMMUNICATION & EXPRESSIVE ARTS(COMMUNICATIONS CONTESTS, THEATER ARTS CONTEST, MUSIC CONTEST,

COMMUNICATIONS EXHIBITS, HERITAGE & PHOTOGRAPHY) COMMUNICATIONS CONTESTS

GENERAL RULES – COMMUNICATIONS CONTESTS 1. ENTRY LIMITS - Participants may enter a maximum of:

• 1 speech • 1 Public Service Announcement (PSA) • 1 Presentation

2. ELIGIBILITY - Youth must be currently enrolled in 4-H. 3. PRE-ENTRY - Participants must pre-enter for the Public Speaking, PSA, and Presentations

Contests by completing the appropriate entry forms and submitting them to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office.

4. DRESS CODE - No 4-H attire is required. Participants are expected to dress appropriately for the contest. No costumes or special effect clothing is allowed.

PUBLIC SPEAKING CONTEST RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – COMMUNICATIONS CONTEST 2. AGE DIVISIONS – Junior (8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year), Intermediate (11 to 13 years of age as of December

31st of the preceding year), and Senior (14 years of age and older as of December 31st of the preceding year). 3. TIME LIMITS –

• Junior Division – 1 to 3 minutes • Intermediate Division – 3 to 5 minutes • Senior Division - 5 to 8 minutes In the Senior Division the judge will deduct three points from the contestant’s score for each 30 seconds under or over the time limit.

4. TOPIC – All speeches must be original and include 4-H as the major component of the speech. 5. ORIGINAL MATERIAL – Previous speeches may not be used verbatim in the 4-H Public Speaking Contest and the use of an old speech written

by a sibling, other 4-H member, or someone else is prohibited. The same ideas from a speech previously written and delivered by the 4-H member in competition may be used, but the speech must be 4-H related. Enough changes should be made to make an old speech new to the speaker and audience.

6. CITATIONS – The source of information used in the speech should be acknowledged. For example, an article from a magazine may be used for reference; but should not be quoted directly unless you cite your source.

7. VISUAL AIDS – No visual aids or props are allowed 8. DISTRICT CONTEST – A county may send three individuals to the district contest in each of the following age divisions: Junior Public Speaking,

Intermediate Public Speaking, and Senior Public Speaking. Participants must receive a purple ribbon to qualify for the district contest.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 165 PUBLIC SPEAKING PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 902 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age CLASS 903 Intermediate Division 11 and 13 years of age CLASS 904 Senior Division 14 years of age and older

PUBLIC SERVICE ANNOUNCMENT CONTEST RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – COMMUNICATIONS CONTESTS 2. AGE DIVISIONS – Junior (8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year), Intermediate (11 to 13 years of age as of December

31st of the preceding year), and Senior (14 years of age and older as of December 31st of the preceding year). 3. TIME LIMITS – All PSAs are to be 60 seconds in length. 4. THEME – All PSA’s will use the designated state theme for the year. 5. PURPOSE – All radio PSAs must promote 4-H and be general enough to be used anywhere in Nebraska at any time of the year. 6. TAG LINES – All 4-H PSAs must include the following tag line within the last ten seconds of the PSA: “Learn more about the University of

Nebraska – Lincoln Extension 4-H Youth Development Program at 4h.unl.edu.” The tag line is included in the 60 second time limit. 7. SOUND EFFECTS AND MUSIC – Sound effects and public domain music may be used. Copyrighted material may not be used. 8. ORIGINAL MATERIAL – All PSAs must be the original work of the presenter. Contestants may not use PSAs written and provided by the state or

national staff. 9. SUBMITTING PSAs – PSAs will be submitted electronically as a .wav or .mp3 format along with the PSA’s text with the Johnson County

Communications Contest Entry Form to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. 10. DISTRICT CONTEST – A county may send three individuals to the district contest in each of the following age divisions: Junior PSA, Intermediate

PSA, and Senior PSA. Participants must receive a purple ribbon to qualify for the district contest.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 165 PSAs PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 905 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age CLASS 906 Intermediate Division 12 and 13 years of age CLASS 907 Senior Division 14 years of age and older

PRESENTATION CONTEST RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – COMMUNICATIONS CONTESTS 2. AGE DIVISIONS – Junior (8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year), Intermediate (11 to 13 years of age as of December

31st of the preceding year), and Senior (14 years of age and older as of December 31st of the preceding year). 3. TEAMS – May consist of two individual 4-H members. There is no separate class for team presentations.

26

4. CLASS DESCRIPTIONS ILLUSTRATED PRESENTATION – An illustrated presentation is a live presentation with a formal talk where you will use visual aids (such as props, posters, computer-based visuals, handouts, videos, etc.) to show and tell others how to do something. 4-H FILM FEST – Digital videos are films that display the recording, reproducing, and broadcasting of moving visual images. During the 4-H Film Fest, youth will provide a one-minute oral introduction (name, background/goal of presentation, intended audience, where presentation could be shared, etc.) followed by the showing of their digital video.

Film Topic: 4-H Film Fest digital videos should engage the audience and teach them something the 4-Her is learning about science, healthy living, citizenship, or agricultural literacy. Enrollment in the project are in which the participant is making a video is not required. The following digital videos may be entered into the 4-H film fest:

• Video Public Service Announcement: A short video that communicates an educational message focused on a cause, activity, or event. • Narrative: A video that tells a fact or fiction story. • Documentary: A video that presents factual information about a person, event, or process. • Animation: A video created by techniques that simulate movement from individual images.

5. TIME LIMITS – ILLUSTRATED PRESENTATIONS

• Individual Presentation – 6 to 8 minutes • Team Presentation – 8 to 10 minutes

(Participants may be penalized if their presentation exceeds the limits.) 4-H FILM FEST

• Video PSA – 60 seconds • Narrative – 3-5 minutes • Documentary – 3-5 minutes • Animation – 3-5 minutes

6. EQUIPMENT – An LCD projector and computer equipped with Microsoft Office (Power Point 2000 or greater) will be provided. Presentations should be brought on a USB drive. Participants may also provide their own computer or other equipment as needed. If participants will be using a file format other than Power Point please contact the Extension Office ahead of time in order to make proper arrangements.

7. STATE CONTEST – Illustrated presentations and 4-H Film Fest entries must receive a purple rating at the county contest. Participants must be at least 10 years old as of December 31st of the preceding year. Additionally, counties may advance one individual or one two-person team illustrated presentation (top purple in the county contest) to the Nebraska State Fair 4-H Premier Presentation contest. Participants in the Premier Presenter Contest must be at least 12 years old as of December 31st of the preceding year. Participants in the Premier Presenter Contest may not participate in any other presentation classes at the Nebraska State Fair.

8. MANUALS – Materials are available online at: http://4h.unl.edu/presentations DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 151 PRESENTATIONS PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Illustrated Presentation Junior Division CLASS 902 4-H Film Fest (digital video) Junior Division CLASS 903 Illustrated Presentation Intermediate Division CLASS 904 4-H Film Fest (digital video) Intermediate Division CLASS 905 Illustrated Presentation Senior Division CLASS 906 4-H Film Fest (digital video) Senior Division THEATRE ARTS CONTEST RULES 1. AGE DIVISIONS – Junior (8 to 10 years of age as of December 31st of the preceding year), Intermediate (11 to 13 years of age as of December

31st of the preceding year), and Senior (14 years of age and older as of December 31st of the preceding year) 2. ENTRY LIMITS – Participants may enter a maximum of:

1 individual event (costumed presentation, dramatic reading, or puppet play) 1 team event (costumed presentation, dramatic reading, or puppet play)

3. TIME LIMITS – Each group is allowed two minutes after the cue from the contest chair to arrange themselves on stage and begin performing. Props if used, must be in place within the two-minute time limit. The performance of each group is limited to not more than six minutes.

4. TEAMS - Each group must have two or more participants, all must be 4-H members. 5. CLASSES –

COSTUMED PRESENTATION - Youth will put together a costume and give an in-character presentation wearing the costume. DRAMATIC READING - Youth will present an interpretation of a dramatic reading either from memory or using a script, may be either an original work or from a published source. PUPPET PLAY - Youth will present a puppet play with either handmade or purchased puppets, may be either an original work or from a published source.

6. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 100 THEATRE ARTS CONTEST PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 901 CLASS 902 CLASS 903

Individual Costumed Presentation Individual Costumed Presentation Individual Costumed Presentation

Junior Division Intermediate Division Senior Division

CLASS 904 CLASS 905 CLASS 906

Individual Dramatic Reading Individual Dramatic Reading Individual Dramatic Reading

Junior Division Intermediate Division Senior Division

CLASS 907 CLASS 908 CLASS 909

Individual Puppet Play Individual Puppet Play Individual Puppet Play

Junior Division Intermediate Division Senior Division

CLASS 910 CLASS 911 CLASS 912

Team Costumed Presentation Team Costumed Presentation Team Costumed Presentation

Junior Division Intermediate Division Senior Division

CLASS 913 CLASS 914 CLASS 915

Team Dramatic Reading Team Dramatic Reading Team Dramatic Reading

Junior Division Intermediate Division Senior Division

27

CLASS 916 CLASS 917

Team Puppet Play Team Puppet Play

Junior Division Intermediate Division

CLASS 918 Team Puppet Play Senior Division GENERAL RULES – MUSIC CONTEST 1. DIVISIONS – Senior Division: 4-H members ages 12 years of age and up (as of December 31st)

Junior Division: 4-H members ages 8 to 11 years of age (as of December 31st) 2. GROUPS – Each group must have three or more participants, all must be 4-H members. A 4-H member may sing or perform in only one group;

but may accompany another group. 3. BANDS – All performers in the band class must be 4-H members. Participants must provide your own music stands. 4. TIME LIMIT – Each group is allowed two minutes after the cue from the contest chair to arrange themselves on stage and begin performing. Props

if used, must be in place within the two-minute time limit. The performance of each group is limited to not more than six minutes. 5. SONG SELECTION – Any number of songs may be performed within the six-minute time limit. Groups may perform any selection of their choice. 6. DIRECTOR – Song groups, combos, and bands may appear with or without a director. The director must be a 4-H member. 7. ACCOMPANIMENT – Recorded background music (no lyrics) may be used. Performing groups must bring a copy of their music (CD, tape, etc.) if

using recorded background music. Piano, guitar, or other instruments may also accompany groups. Live accompaniment, if used, may be by a 4-H member, parent, leader, volunteer, or music teacher. Not more than one adult may accompany a group.

8. DRESS CODE - No 4-H attire is required. Participants are expected to dress appropriately for the contest. DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 200 MUSIC CONTEST PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Dance Solo Routine Junior Division CLASS 902 Dance Solo Routine Senior Division CLASS 903 Dance Pairs Routine Junior Division CLASS 904 Dance Pairs Routine Senior Division CLASS 905 Dance Group Routine Junior Division CLASS 906 Dance Group Routine Senior Division CLASS 907 Vocal Music Solo Junior Division CLASS 908 Vocal Music Solo Senior Division CLASS 909 Vocal Music Duet Junior Division CLASS 910 Vocal Music Duet Senior Division CLASS 911 Vocal Music Group Junior Division CLASS 912 Vocal Music Group Senior Division CLASS 913 Instrumental Music Solo Junior Division CLASS 914 Instrumental Music Solo Senior Division CLASS 915 Instrumental Music Duet Junior Division CLASS 916 Instrumental Music Duet Senior Division CLASS 917 Instrumental Music Group Junior Division CLASS 918 Instrumental Music Group Senior Division CLASS 919 Band Group must be 3 or more individuals with instruments of their choice; including piano. May include vocalist.

COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL RULES – COMMUNICATIONS EXHIBITS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE LEVEL of competition. 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class. 3. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the communications division. 4. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 154 COMMUNICATIONS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

MODULE 1 CLASS 901 Poster - Create a poster, measuring either 22”x28” or 24”x36”, that showcases what was learned in this project area. CLASS 902 Essay - Write an essay (3-5 pages) that showcases what was learned in this project area.

MODULE 2 Use one or a combination of the experiential activities in the Communications, Module 2 curriculum to create an educational poster or essay sharing with others what you have learned. Topics may include, but are not limited to:

• Identifying cultural differences in communication • Developing guidelines for internet etiquette • Evaluating another person’s presentation • Identifying communication careers • Preparing a presentation using a form of technology

CLASS 1 Poster - Create a poster, measuring either 22”x28” or 24”x36”, that showcases what was learned in this project area.CLASS 2 Essay - Write an essay (3-5 pages) that showcases what was learned in this project area.

MODULE 3 Use one or a combination of the experiential activities in the Communications, Module 3 curriculum to create an educational poster, essay, or digital media sharing with others what you have learned. Topics may include, but are not limited to:

• Composing a personal resume • Completing research on a speech or presentation topic • Identifying ways to reduce risks online • Evaluating own cell phone usage and etiquette • Critiquing advertisements • Job shadowing a communication professional

28

CLASS 3 CLASS 4 CLASS 5

Poster - Create a poster, measuring either 22”x28” or 24”x36”, that showcases what was learned in this project area. Essay - Write an essay (3-5 pages) that showcases what was learned in this project area. Digital Media - Design a form of digital media (advertisement, flyer, short video or presentation, social media or web page, etc.) that showcases what was learned in this project area. Upload the digital media file to an online location (web site, Dropbox, Google Drive, YouTube, Flickr, etc.) and using the web address of the digital media file, create a QR code (using any free QR code creator, ex. qr-code-generator.com). Print the following on an 8.5”x11” sheet of cardstock: 1) the QR code, 2) 1-3 sentences about what viewers will see when they access the QR code on their mobile device.

PHOTOGRAPHY GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H MEMBERS ARE ALLOWED ENTRIES IN ONLY ONE UNIT OF COMPETITION. 4-H MEMBERS MAY ONLY ENTER ONE

EXHIBIT PER CLASS. 3. PHOTOGRAPHS – A photograph may only be used on one exhibit and may be taken with a film or digital camera. Photos must be shot during the

current project year by the 4-H member. 4. EXHIBITS – Securely attach photographs. Photos that are unattached will be disqualified. Do not use photo corners, borders, or place coverings

over the exhibits. Do not include negatives. 5. DATA TAGS – A DATA TAG IS REQUIRED ON ALL CLASSES, failure to attach the required data tag will result in a lower ribbon placing. Glue

Data Tags securely to the back of exhibits or include as page one in photo album, photo journal, and photography portfolio exhibits. Securely attach the tags to the back of exhibits or include as page one in your photo showcase. Unit I prints and displays require the Unit I Print/Display Data Tag. Unit II prints and displays require the Unit II Print/Display Data Tag. Unit II showcases require the Unit II Showcase Data Tag. All Unit III entries, including portfolios require the Unit III Data Tag. Data Tags are available in the Extension Office or online at: https://johnsoncounty4h.org/static-exhibit-resources/

6. EXHIBIT GUIDELINES – Exhibitors are required to follow the following exhibit guidelines. Failure to do so will result in a lowering of the ribbon placing.

PICTURE DISPLAYS (Unit I & Unit II) • Three 4” x 6” photos are to be mounted on horizontal 11” x 14” black (preferred) or white poster or matting board. • Every photo on picture display must be pencil numbered (no. 2 lead pencil) below (for judge's reference only). Numbers should be readable

but not detract from display. • No titles, captions, or stick-on numbers will be allowed. • Photos must be mounted vertically or horizontally. • Data Tags are required (See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY # 5).

EXHIBIT PRINTS (All Units) • All exhibit prints are 8" x 10" prints mounted in 11" x 14" (outside size) cut matting (no frames) with a sandwich mat-board backing (not foam

board); rectangular or oval inside matt opening. • Place photos horizontally or vertically as appropriate. • Data Tags are required (See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY # 5).

PHOTO SHOWCASE (Unit II) • Choose one lesson from each of the four project areas in the Level 2 project manual titled “Controlling the Image” • Take three photos that showcase each lesson. You will have 12 photos in all. • Mount 4” x6” photos on a 8 ½” x 11” piece of white paper. For each set of three photos include a short paragraph describing the lesson you

are illustrating and changes you made to your camera settings for each photo (shutter speed, aperture, type of lighting). You may also draw the rule of thirds or golden photo on your photos.

• Place pages in an 8 ½” x 11” black or white 3 ring binder. Plastic sleeves are recommended for each page. • Data Tags are required (See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY # 5).

PHOTOGRAPHY PORTFOLIO (Unit III) • Select ten photos from your 4-H career that represent the strongest collection of your work. • Photos may have been taken at any time during the 4-H experience and may have been previously exhibited. Photos can only be used in a

portfolio once. • Place photos in plastic sleeves and present them in an 8 ½” x 11” black or white 3 ring binder. No matting is necessary • On the page prior to EACH photo include an information sheet for each photo that includes: 1. Personal Data Tag Part A, 2. Photograph title,

and 3. a paragraph describing how the photo contributes to the overall intent of your portfolio. The information sheet and the photo should create a 2-page layout so that when the portfolio is open the information sheet is the page on the left and the photo is the page on the right.

7. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED INFORMATION – Those 4-H members exhibiting in the county only classes of Photo Album (all units) and Photo Flop (all units) must submit additional information with their exhibit(s).

ALBUM (All Units) • Album of 25 more photographs, labeled with date and what/who is shown in the picture. • Must be taken in this year’s project. • Previous year’s photographs may be included, but must be separated and easily distinguished by tabs or other means of division. • Members may use or make any album they choose. • This class is to encourage management of pictures taken and exhibited in the photography project area during a member’s entire 4-H career.

PHOTO FLOPS (All Units) • Three photographs, each illustrating a different photography mistake. • Below each picture describe the error in photography technique and how the picture could be improved.

8. TOP EXHIBIT - A top exhibit will be selected for each photography unit from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons that unit. 9. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 180 PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT I PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT I CLASS 901 Picture Display – Entry will consist of 3 photographs. No captions are allowed. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6

for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 902 Picture Story Display - Entry will consist of 3 photographs that tell a story (include an introduction, body, and conclusion). No

captions are allowed. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

29

CLASS 903 True Leader Exhibit Print: Explore true leaders in your community. True leaders can be anyone from community leaders, teachers, and volunteers to parents and friends. So, what sets them apart? What makes someone a true leader? What effect do they have on the people or environment around them? How can you tell their story through photography? See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 904 Favorite Exhibit Print – Unit I - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 905 Favorite Picture Display – Unit I - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for display guidelines. CLASS 906 Photo Album – Unit I - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions. CLASS 907 Photo Flop – Unit I - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 181 PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT II PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT II CLASS 10 Photo Showcase - Entry will consist of a three-ring binger of three 4” x 6” photos showcasing four lessons addressed in the Unit II

manual “Controlling the Image – Level 2.” A showcase will include a total of 12 photos. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 20 Manual Setting Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of a print that showcases the participant’s ability to master the manual settings on the camera. 1) Manual Focus, 2) Manual Aperture, 3) Manual Shutter Speed, 4) Combination of any of the listed techniques, 5) Other technique not listed. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 30 Lighting Display or Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of a display of three photographs of three different subjects OR an exhibit print that demonstrates lighting effects. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 40 Composition Display or Exhibit - Entry will consist of three photos illustrating three completely different views or angles of the same object. Entry will consist of a print that illustrates one of the following composition lessons in the Level 2 project manual (Rule of Thirds, The Golden Photo, Space Tells the Story, Bits and Pieces, or Capture a Candid Photo). See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 50 Smart Phone Candid Capture Display or Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of a display of 3 pictures of 3 different candid shots or an exhibit print that captures a candid, un-posed moment. *This class is only for photos captured on mobile device (phone or tablet.) See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 60 True Leader Exhibit Print: Explore true leaders in your community. True leaders can be anyone from community leaders, teachers, and volunteers to parents and friends. So, what sets them apart? What makes someone a true leader? What effect do they have on the people or environment around them? How can you tell their story through photography? See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 901 Favorite Exhibit Print – Unit II - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 902 Favorite Picture Display – Unit II - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for display guidelines. CLASS 903 Photo Album – Unit II - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions. CLASS 904 Photo Flop – Unit II - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions.

DEPARTMENT B DIVISION 182 PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT III PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

PHOTOGRAPHY – UNIT III CLASS 10 Photography Portfolio - An entry will consist of ten photos that represent the strongest collection of the participants work. See

GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 20 Advanced Lighting Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of an exhibit print that illustrates reflection. See GENERAL RULES –

PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 30 Breaking the Rules - Entry will consist of a print that presents a unique focal point and uses different viewpoint, lines, shapes and

spacing to create a compelling image. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 40 Portrait Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of a print that captures both the physical characteristics and personality of their subject.

See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 50 Challenging Exhibit Print - Entry will consist of a print that illustrates a special effect, such as: double exposure, light painting, flash

multiple exposure, filters, night time exposure, digitally altered photos, or other technique not listed. See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 60 True Leader Exhibit Print: Explore true leaders in your community. True leaders can be anyone from community leaders, teachers, and volunteers to parents and friends. So, what sets them apart? What makes someone a true leader? What effect do they have on the people or environment around them? How can you tell their story through photography? See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines.

CLASS 901 Favorite Exhibit Print – Unit III - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #6 for exhibit guidelines. CLASS 902 Photo Album – Unit III - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions. CLASS 903 Photo Flop – Unit III - See GENERAL RULES – PHOTOGRAPHY #7 for additional instructions.

CONSUMER & FAMILY SCIENCE(FASHION SHOW, HERITAGE, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT, CLOTHING & FIBER ARTS,

CONSUMER MANAGEMENT, ENTREPRENEURSHIP, HOME ENVIRONMENT & QUILT QUEST)

FASHION SHOW GENERAL RULES – FASHION SHOW 1. ENTRY LIMITS - A participant is allowed a maximum of SEVEN entries with NO more than:

• 1 entry in First Year Fashion, STEAM Clothing 1, STEAM Clothing 2, and STEAM Clothing 3 • 1 entry in Knitting • 1 entry in Crochet • 1 entry in Beyond the Needle (formerly Decorate Your Duds) • 1 entry in Make One Buy One • 1 entry in Upcycled Garment/Accessory • 1 entry in Garment Made for Someone Else • 1 entry in Shopping in Style • 1 entry in $15 Outfit Challenge

2. PRE-ENTRY – Participants must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry forms and submitting them to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office.

30

3. PUBLIC FASHION SHOW - Participants are expected to participate in the Public Fashion Show; participants may only be excused from the public show by the fashion show superintendent and/or Extension staff. 4. AWARDS - Special awards will be given to the top three individuals in:

• Beyond the Needle – Junior Division (ages 8 to 11 as of December 31st) • Beyond the Needle – Senior Division (ages 12 and over as of December 31st) • Shopping in Style – Junior Division (ages 8 to 11 as of December 31st) • Shopping in Style – Senior Division (ages 12 and over as of December 31st) • $15 Dollar Outfit Challenge • STEAM Clothing 1 • STEAM Clothing 2 • STEAM Clothing 3 • Knitting & Crochet • Make One Buy One • Upcycled Garment/Accessory STATE FAIR – The judge will select a top exhibitor from the STEAM Clothing 2 and STEAM Clothing 3 classes to represent Johnson County at the Nebraska State Fair 4-H Fashion Show. Also, the top exhibitor in the Shopping in Style – Senior Division will be chosen to represent Johnson County at the Nebraska State Fair 4-H Shopping in Style Fashion Show.

5. LEVEL REQUIREMENTS • FIRST YEAR FASHION – 4-H members who are enrolled in their first year of the STEAM Clothing 1 project. 4-H members who have

enrolled in or completed STEAM Clothing 2 or STEAM Clothing 3 projects may not participate in this class. Check the Construction Skills Checklist and acceptable fabrics list in the manual.

• STEAM CLOTHING 1 – 4-H members who have enrolled in or completed STEAM Clothing 2 or STEAM Clothing 3 projects may not participate in this class. Check the Construction Skills Checklist and acceptable fabrics list in the manual. A firm, medium weight woven fabric is appropriate. In-seam or patch pockets, simple lined vests, or flat constructed sleeves are acceptable. Plaids and striped fabric, garments with collars, set-in sleeves, waistbands, and zipper are NOT accepted.

• STEAM CLOTHING 2 – 4-H members who have enrolled in or who have completed the STEAM Clothing 3 project are not eligible to enter this class. Check the manual for further guidance on acceptable patterns, fabrics, etc.

• STEAM CLOTHING 3 - Check the manual for further guidance on acceptable patterns, fabrics, etc. 6. ACCEPTABLE ENTRIES

• FIRST YEAR FASHION – Simple pillow, pillowcase, laundry bag, or bag/purse. • STEAM CLOTHING 1 – Simple dress, simple skirted outfit (skirt with shirt or vest), simple pants/shorts outfit (pants or shorts with shirt or

vest). ALL items modeled must be constructed by the exhibitor, except a purchased top can be worn to complete an simple skirted or pants/shorts outfit that includes a vest.

• STEAM CLOTHING 2 – Dress; skirted outfit (skirt with shirt, vest or jacket); pants/shorts outfit (pants or shorts with shirt, vest or jacket). A purchased top can be worn to complete a vest or jacket outfit with a skirt, pants, or shorts.

• STEAM CLOTHING 3 – Dress; skirted outfit (skirt with shirt, vest, or jacket); formal (dress or tuxedo for prom, wedding or other formal occasion); pants/shorts outfit (pants or shorts with shirt, vest, or jacket); specialty wear (costume, western wear (chaps, chinks, or riding attire)); sportswear (jogging outfit, swimwear, aerobic wear, or ski wear); or coat/outerwear/jacket (lined or unlined, non-tailored). A purchased top can be worn to complete a vest or jacket outfit with a skirt, pants or shorts.

• MAKE ONE – BUY ONE - 4-H members enrolled in STEAM Clothing 1, STEAM Clothing 2, or STEAM Clothing 3 may enter this class. Sewn garment(s) should be combined with a purchased item to make a complete wearable outfit.

• UPCYCLED GARMENT OR ACCESSORY - Create a garment or accessory from used textile based items. The original used item must be redesigned (not just decorated) in some way to create a new wearable piece of clothing. The finished item must reflect at least one skill learned in this project.

• GARMENT MADE FOR SOMEONE ELSE - 4-H members enrolled in STEAM Clothing 1, STEAM Clothing 2, STEAM Clothing 3, Knitting and Crochet may enter this class. The 4-H member should use the skills learned in the 4-H project they are enrolled in to make an outfit/garment for someone else. The individual for whom the outfit/garment was constructed will model in this class.

• SHOPPING IN STYLE - In the Shopping in Style classes the 4-H member will model the outfit purchased in their project. Participants will also be required to fill out a written report and submit it with their entry forms prior to the Fashion Show.

• $15 OUTFIT CHALLENGE – The outfit must be selected and purchased from garage sales, thrift stores, consignment or resale shops, clearance, etc. The total cost of the outfit may not exceed $15 (excluding the cost of shoes worn while modeling), The exhibit can be worn as purchased, or may be altered or remade (example: a denim skirt could have a ruffle added or jeans could be cut off to a Capri length and have a band of fabric added). Participants will be required to fill out a written report and submit it with their entry prior to the Fashion Show.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 410 FASHION SHOW PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 900 Beyond the Needle Junior Division (ages 8 to 11) CLASS 905 Beyond the Needle Senior Division (ages 12 and over) CLASS 910 First Year Fashion CLASS 915 STEAM Clothing 1 CLASS 920 STEAM Clothing 2 CLASS 925 STEAM Clothing 3 CLASS 930 Knitted Garment/Accessory CLASS 935 Crocheted Garment/Accessory CLASS 940 Make One – Buy One CLASS 945 Upcycled Garment/Accessory CLASS 950 Garment Made for Someone Else CLASS 955 Shopping in Style – Junior Division (4-Hers 8 to 11 years of age) CLASS 960 Shopping in Style – Senior Division (4-Hers 12 years of age and over) CLASS 965 $15 Outfit Challenge

31

HERITAGE GENERAL RULES – HERITAGE 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE LEVEL of completion. 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class. 3. PURPOSE – An exhibit of items, pictures, maps, charts, slides/tapes, drawings, illustrations, writings or displays that depict the heritage of the

member’s family or community, or 4-H history. 4. RESPONSIBILITY – PLEASE NOTE: exhibits entered at the 4-H member’s own risk: UNL Extension and the Johnson County Fair Board will not

be responsible for loos or damage to family heirloom items or any items in this division. 5. SIZE LIMITS – Displays should not be larger than 22” x 28” wide. Display collections securely in an attractive container no larger than 22” x 28”. 6. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – All entries must have documentation included. Failure to include the required supporting information will result in

the lowering of ribbon place. 7. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the heritage division. 8. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT A DIVISION 101 HERITAGE – LEVEL I PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50

HERITAGE – LEVEL I (1-4 years in project) CLASS 1 Heritage Poster of Flat Exhibit - Entries may be pictures, posters, or items that depict family heritage. Exhibit must be supported by

a written explanation. CLASS 2 Family Genealogy/History Notebook - Include pedigree charts/family group sheets, with documentation for two – three generations

of one family line, expanding each year. CLASS 3 Local History Scrapbook/Notebook - A scrapbook or notebook that depicts history of local community or Nebraska that helps youth

appreciate their heritage. Must be work of individual 4-H member, no club projects. CLASS 4 Framed Family Pictures (Group or Individual) - A framed grouping of pictures (of family groups or individuals) showing family

history. Pictures must be supported by a written explanation. CLASS 5 Other Exhibits Depicting Heritage - Another exhibit depicting the heritage of the 4-H member’s family or community. Exhibits must

be supported by a written explanation. May include, biographical album of themselves or another family member, family cookbooks, etc.

CLASS 6 4-H History Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to the 4-H history of a local club or county. Must be the work of an individual 4-H member, no club projects.

CLASS 7 4-H History Poster - A poster relating the 4-H history of a local club, county, or individual. CLASS 8 Story or Illustration - A story or illustration about a historical event. Pictures must be supported by a written explanation. CLASS 9 Book Review - A book review about local, Nebraska, or regional history. CLASS 10 Other Historical Exhibit - Another exhibit of historical importance. Must include a written explanation of historical importance. CLASS 11 Family Traditions Book - A scrapbook depicting family traditions of the past. CLASS 12 Family Traditions Exhibit - A story or illustration of a family tradition or event. Exhibits must be supported by a written explanation. CLASS 13 4-H Club/County Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating 4-H history of a local club or county compiled by club historian. CLASS 14 4-H Member Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to individual 4-H member’s 4-H history. CLASS 15 Special Events Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to a 4-H special event, such as Congress or CWF or a personal or family special

event, such as a trip, family reunion, etc.

DEPARTMENT A DIVISION 102 HERITAGE – LEVEL II PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50

HERITAGE – LEVEL II (Over 4 years in project) CLASS 1 Heritage Poster of Flat Exhibit - Entries may be pictures, posters, or items that depict family heritage. Exhibit must be supported by

a written explanation. CLASS 2 Family Genealogy/History Notebook - Include pedigree charts/family group sheets, with documentation for two – three generations

of one family line, expanding each year. CLASS 3 Local History Scrapbook/Notebook - A scrapbook or notebook that depicts history of local community or Nebraska that helps youth

appreciate their heritage. Must be work of individual 4-H member, no club projects. CLASS 4 Framed Family Pictures (Group or Individual) - A framed grouping of pictures (of family groups or individuals) showing family

history. Pictures must be supported by a written explanation. CLASS 5 Other Exhibits Depicting Heritage - Another exhibit depicting the heritage of the 4-H member’s family or community. Exhibits must

be supported by a written explanation. May include, biographical album of themselves or another family member, family cookbooks, etc.

CLASS 6 4-H History Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to the 4-H history of a local club or county. Must be the work of an individual 4-H member, no club projects.

CLASS 7 4-H History Poster - A poster relating the 4-H history of a local club, county, or individual. CLASS 8 Story or Illustration - A story or illustration about a historical event. Pictures must be supported by a written explanation. CLASS 9 Book Review - A book review about local, Nebraska, or regional history. CLASS 10 Other Historical Exhibit - Another exhibit of historical importance. Must include a written explanation of historical importance. CLASS 11 Historic Landmark Exhibit - An exhibit depicting the importance of a community or Nebraska historic landmark. CLASS 12 Community Report - A community report documenting something of historical significance from past to present. CLASS 13 Historic Collection - A historic collection displayed securely and attractively in a container no larger than 22” x 28”. CLASS 14 Documentary - A video/DVD or slide/tape documentary of a family or community event. Must be produced and edited by the 4-H

member. CLASS 15 4-H Club/County Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating 4-H history of a local club or county compiled by club historian. CLASS 16 4-H Member Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to individual 4-H member’s 4-H history. CLASS 17 Special Events Scrapbook - A scrapbook relating to a 4-H special event, such as Congress or CWF or a personal or family special

event, such as a trip, family reunion, etc.

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT GENERAL RULES – HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. INFORMATION SHEETS – Entries in classes 1-6, and 8 require additional supporting information. Exhibits without the additional supporting

information will be lowered a ribbon placing.

32

Information sheets for classes 1 – 6 should include answers to the following questions: • Where did I get the idea for this exhibit? • What decisions did I make to be sure exhibit is safe for child to use? • What age is this toy, game or activity appropriate for and why? (Infant, Birth – 18 months; Toddler, 18 months – 3 years; Preschooler, 3 – 5

years; Middle Childhood, 6 – 9 years). Give two examples that help in understanding the appropriateness of this exhibit for the age of the child (see project manuals).

• How is the toy, game or activity intended to be used by the child? Information sheets for class 8 should include answers to the following questions:

• Which ONE age group (infant, toddler, preschooler, grade schooler (middle childhood)) was this kit prepared for? • What are children this age like? Give two examples to show how the kit would be appropriate for children this age. • What will the child learn or what skills will they gain by using the kit? • What item(s) were made by the 4-H member? The 4-H member should make one or more items in the kit, but purchased items are also

allowed. (It is highly suggested that an inventory list of items in the kit be included). 3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS –

CLASSES 1 – 6 • Items in classes 1 – 6 must be made by the 4-H member and focus on designing toys that meet different needs of children. • The categories for classes 1 – 6 are based on the Early Learning Guidelines in Nebraska which identify the important areas children

should grow and develop. Use the Nebraska Department of Education website and the resources around the Early Learning Guidelines to help understand the six areas and the skills children need to develop to create your exhibit (available at: https://johnsoncounty4h.org/static-exhibit-resources/)

• Possible purchased parts are acceptable such as dice for a grade-schooler to play a game, but a significant part of the exhibit must be made by the 4-H member.

• Items which are not acceptable include: items for display in a child’s room (these should be exhibited in home environment), container but not the contents made by the 4-H member, or a group of items assembled for a purpose but not made by the 4-H member.

• All games must include instructions for playing. CLASS 8 • The purpose of the kit is for the 4-H member to take with them when they babysit in someone else’s home. • Do not make kit for combination of ages or for your own family to use. • The exhibitor should make one or more items in the kit, but purchased items are also allowed. • A list of items in the kit should be included. • Display in box or bag suitable for what it contains. Approximate size not larger than 12"x15"x10". • All items in kit must be safe for a child to handle. • Most importantly the kit should serve a defined purpose, not just be a catch all for several items.

4. ONLINE RESOURCES – To learn the characteristics of suitable and unsuitable tops and for characteristics of children at various stages of development refer to “What it takes to be Your Teen Babysitter”. Additionally, another resource that will assist in understanding young children is the Nebraska Early Learning Guidelines. Both are available at: https://johnsoncounty4h.org/static-exhibit-resources/

5. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the human development division. 6. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 200 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

CLASS 1 Social Emotional Development – Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 2 Language and Literacy Development - Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 3 Science - Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 4 Health and Physical Development - Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 5 Math - Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 6 Creative Arts - Toy, game, or activity made for a selected and identified age group. CLASS 7 Activity with a Younger Child – Poster or scrapbook showing 4-H member working with a child age 0 to 8 years. May show making

something with the child, care of child, or child interactions. May include photos, captions, story or essay. Size of exhibit is your choice. Others may take photos so exhibitor appears in photos, but the exhibitor must make scrapbook or poster. No information sheet is needed for class 7.

CLASS 8 Baby Sitting Kit – Babysitting kit for ONE of the following age groups: infant, toddler, preschooler, or grade-schooler (middle childhood). For complete instructions and guidelines see GENERAL RULES – CHILD DEVELOPMENT #3-4.

CLASS 9 Family Involvement Entry – A scrapbook, poster or story describing an activity the family did together. It might include making something such as a dollhouse or feed bunk. Items may be exhibited if desired. Other possibilities include a house or farm cleanup project, a family reunion, a celebration of a family milestone, a trip or vacation, moving, a community service project. Photographs are encouraged. Visuals should show family participation. Participation by all family members is important. Include a list of family members and what each person did to participate in the event.

CLASS 10 Growing with Others – Scrapbook or poster. Examples include: How to decide if it’s time you can be home alone; How responsibilities and privileges are related; Friendships; Working with others; Understanding rules and boundaries; A family tree; A family rules chart; A family meal plan; A home safety checklist; Being street smart (safety); A school scrapbook showing yourself and your school activities, memories, and special interests.

CLASS 11 Growing in Communities – Scrapbook or poster. Examples include: A career study; A photo story about your own growth and development (not only physically but emotionally, socially, spiritually, mentally); A television evaluation (see project manual); How you have overcome obstacles; Friendships; A community profile; A community service project; Working with parents; Teaching experiences; Understanding discipline; or Playground safety check.

CLOTHING & FIBER ARTS GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING & FIBER ARTS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. IDENTIFICATION LABELS – Each item entered as a clothing, knitting or crochet exhibit must have a label attached. Information should include:

county, exhibitor’s name, exhibitor’s age, class (which the garment is entered), and number of years enrolled in the project in which exhibiting. Labels should be attached with a safety pin or self-stick. UNL Extension and the Johnson County Fair Board are not responsible for unlabeled garments.

33

3. HANGERS – Clothing articles that can be hung MUST be entered on a metal hanger or hanger with swivel hanger. Hangers should be attached (using twist ties or rubber bands) in exhibits with more than one piece (i.e. skirted, pants, or shorts outfit, etc.).

4. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Exhibits not having the required supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing. 5. LEVEL REQUIREMENTS –

• STEAM CLOTHING 1 – 4-H members who have enrolled in or completed STEAM Clothing 2 or STEAM Clothing 3 are not eligible to enter this class.

• STEAM CLOTHING 2 – 4-H members who have enrolled in or who have completed STEAM Clothing 3 are not eligible to enter this class. Check the STEAM Clothing 2 – Simply Sewing manual for further guidance on acceptable patterns, fabrics, etc.

• STEAM CLOTHING 3 – 4-H members may sew garments (for themselves or others) from any pattern or fabric and should demonstrate sewing skills beyond STEAM CLOTHING 2. Check the STEAM Clothing 3 – A Stitch Further manual for further guidance.

6. TOP EXHIBITS – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the STEAM Clothing 1, STEAM Clothing 2, STEAM Clothing 3, Beyond the Needle, Knitting, and Crochet divisions.

7. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

BEGINNING CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION RULES (STEAM Clothing 1) 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. PATTERNS & FABRIC – Exhibits will be simple articles requiring minimal skills. Follow suggested skills in project manual STEAM Clothing 1:

Fundamentals (4H2210). Exhibits must be made from medium weight woven fabrics that will sew and press smoothly, flannel/ fleece is acceptable. Solid color fabrics or those having an overall print are acceptable. NO PLAIDS, STRIPES, NAPPED or JERSEY KNIT. Patterns should be simple without darts, set-in sleeves, and collars. Raglan and kimono sleeves are acceptable

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 220 STEAM CLOTHING 1 PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 901 Clothing Portfolio – Complete at least three different samples/activities from Chapter 2 OR Chapter 3 of the project manual. The

Portfolio should be placed in an 8 1/2 x 11, three ring binder. Include an appropriate cover, dividers, and table of contents. (Additional pages can be added each year but should be dated.) See pages 9-10 for portfolio formatting.

CLASS 902 Sewing Kit – Include a list of sewing notions and purpose for each included. (pg. 12-17 in project manual). CLASS 903 Fabric Textile Scrapbook – Must include at least 5 different textile samples. Use Textile Information Cards template on page 41 in

project manual to identify fabric swatches. See project manual for fabric suggestions. CLASS 904 What’s The Difference – 4-H members enrolled in STEAM Clothing 1 may enter an exhibit (not to exceed

22” x 30’) a notebook, poster, small display sharing a project comparison and price point. See project manual, “What’s the Difference?” page 118-119.Exhibits should include pictures NO actual pillows.

CLASS 905 Clothing Service Project – Can include pillows or pillow cases but are not limited too. Exhibit (not to exceed 22” x 30’) a notebook, poster, small display sharing information you generated in the project activity “Serving A Purpose” page 124 and 125.

CLASS 906 Pincushion CLASS 907 Simple Pillow (no bigger than 18” x 18”) CLASS 908 Pillowcase CLASS 909 Laundry Bag CLASS 910 Simple Bag/Purse (no zippers or button holes) CLASS 911 Simple Top (vest acceptable) CLASS 912 Simple Bottom (pants or shorts) CLASS 913 Simple Skirt CLASS 914 Simple Dress CLASS 915 Simple Bag/Purse (no zippers or button holes) CLASS 916 Make One-Buy One - The exhibit is a purchased garment with a constructed garment(s) to make a

complete, wearable outfit. Both constructed and purchased items must be included in the exhibit. An incomplete exhibit will be disqualified.

CLASS 917 Upcycled Garment - Create a garment from used textile-based items. The original used item must be redesigned (not just decorated) in some way to create a new wearable piece of clothing. The finished garment must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 918 Upcycled Clothing Accessory - A wearable accessory made from a used item. The item used must be changed in some way in the redesign process. The finished accessory must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 919 Other Garment - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 1 CLASS 920 Other Garment - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 1 CLASS 921 Other Item/Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 1 CLASS 922 Other Item/Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 1

INTERMEDIATE CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION RULES (STEAM Clothing 2) 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. EXHIBITS - Exhibits entered in this project must reflect at least one new skill learned from the manual (see project manual for skill-level list). 3. PATTERNS & FABRIC – Garments may be made from any woven or knit fabric appropriate to the garment’s design and should demonstrate

sewing skills beyond STEAM Clothing 1. Check the STEAM Clothing 2: Simply Sewing (4H2220) manual for further guidance on acceptable patterns, fabrics, etc.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 222 STEAM CLOTHING 2 PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.25 Red $2.50 White $1.75 CLASS 1 Clothing Portfolio - Complete at least six different samples/activities from Chapter 2 OR Chapter 3 of the project manual. The

Portfolio should be placed in an 8 1/2 x 11, three-ring binder. Include an appropriate cover, dividers, and table of contents. (Additional pages can be added each year but should be dated.) See pages 9-11 for portfolio formatting.

CLASS 2 Expanded Textile Sciences Scrapbook - Must include at least 10 different textile samples. Use Textile Information Cards template on page 39 in project manual to identify fabric swatches. Completed textile cards should be placed in an 8 1/2 x 11, three-ring binder. Include an appropriate cover. See project manual for fabric suggestions.

34

CLASS 3 Design Basics, Understanding Design Principles - 4-H members enrolled in STEAM Clothing 2 may enter an exhibit sharing a learning experience from pages 17-20 in the project manual. The Exhibit may be a notebook, poster, or small display. Exhibits should not exceed 22” x 30”.

CLASS 4 Pressing Matters - 4-H Members enrolled in STEAM Clothing 2 may enter a ham or sleeve roll from pages 21-25 “A Pressing Matter” in the project manual. Exhibit should include answers to lesson questions that are most appropriate to include.

CLASS 5 Entrepreneurial Sewing - Using page 161-167 in the manual, display what products you posted online and analyze the cost of goods purchased to determine the appropriate selling price for your product. The Exhibit may be a notebook, poster, or small display. Exhibits should not exceed 22” x 30”.

CLASS 6 Upcycled Garment - Create a garment from used textile-based items. The original used item must be redesigned (not just decorated) in some way to create a new wearable piece of clothing. The finished garment must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 7 Upcycled Clothing Accessory - A wearable accessory made from a used item. The item used must be changed in some way in the redesign process. The finished accessory must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 8 Textile Clothing Accessory - Textile accessory is constructed using at least one skill learned in this project. Entry examples include: hats, bags, scarves, gloves. No metal, plastic, paper or rubber base items allowed (i.e. barrettes, headbands, flip flops, duct tape, etc.).

CLASS 9 Top (vest acceptable) CLASS 10 Bottom (pants or shorts) CLASS 11 Skirt CLASS 12 Lined or Unlined Jacket CLASS 13 Dress (not formal wear) CLASS 14 Romper or Jumpsuit CLASS 15 Two-Piece Outfit CLASS 901 Make One-Buy One - The exhibit is a purchased garment with a constructed garment(s) to make a complete, wearable outfit. Both

constructed and purchased items must be included in the exhibit. An incomplete exhibit will be disqualified. CLASS 902 Other Garment – Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 2. CLASS 903 Other Garment – Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 2. CLASS 904 Other Textile Clothing Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 2. CLASS 905 Other Textile Clothing Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 2.

ADVANCED CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION RULES (STEAM Clothing 3) 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. EXHIBITS - Exhibits entered in this project must reflect at least one new skill learned from the manual (see project manual for skill-level list). 3. PATTERNS & FABRIC – 4-H members may sew garments (for themselves or others) from any pattern or fabric and should demonstrate sewing

skills beyond STEAM Clothing 2. Entry consists of complete constructed garments only. Wool entries must have the fiber content listed on the identification label. Check the STEAM Clothing 3: A Stitch Further (4H2230) manual for further guidance.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 223 STEAM CLOTHING 3 PREMIUM Purple $5.00 Blue $4.00 Red $3.00 White $2.00 CLASS 1 Clothing Portfolio – Complete at least six different samples/activities from Chapter 2, Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 of the project

manual. The Portfolio should be placed in an 8 1/2 x 11, three-ring binder. Include an appropriate cover, dividers, and table of contents. (Additional pages can be added each year but should be dated.) See pages 11-13 for portfolio formatting.

CLASS 2 Expanded Textile Science Scrapbook – Must include at least 10 different textile samples. Use Textile Information Cards template on page 39 in project manual to identify fabric swatches. Completed textile cards should be placed in an 8 1/2 x 11, three-ring binder. Include an appropriate cover. See project manual for fabric suggestions.

CLASS 3 Advanced Entrepreneurial Sewing - Using lessons learned in Chapter 5 of the manual, display one sample product with a business plan that includes a business ID and logo. The Exhibit may be a notebook, poster, or small display. Exhibits should not exceed 22” x 30”.

CLASS 4 Upcycled Garment – Create a garment from used textile-based items. The original used item must be redesigned (not just decorated) in some way to create a new wearable piece of clothing. The finished garment must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 5 Upcycled Clothing Accessory – A wearable accessory made from a used item. The item used must be changed in some way in the redesign process. The finished accessory must reflect at least one skill learned in this project. A “before” picture and a description of the redesign process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 6 Textile Clothing Accessory - Textile accessory is constructed using at least one skill learned in this project. Entry examples include: hats, bags, scarves, gloves. No metal, plastic, paper or rubber base items allowed (i.e. barrettes, headbands, flip flops, duct tape, etc.).

CLASS 7 Dress or Formal CLASS 8 Skirted Combination (skirt with shirt, vest, or jacket OR jumper and shirt) CLASS 9 Pants or Shorts Combination (pants or shorts with shirt, vest, or jacket) CLASS 10 Romper or Jumpsuit CLASS 11 Specialty Wear (includes: swimwear, costumes, hunting gear, or chaps) CLASS 12 Lined or Unlined Jacket (non-tailored) CLASS 13 Coat, Blazer, Suit Jacket or Outerwear (a tailored blazer or suit jacket or coat) CLASS 901 Make One-Buy One - The exhibit is a purchased garment with a constructed garment(s) to make a complete, wearable outfit. Both

constructed and purchased items must be included in the exhibit. An incomplete exhibit will be disqualified. CLASS 902 Other Garment – Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 3. CLASS 903 Other Garment – Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 3. CLASS 904 Other Textile Clothing Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 3. CLASS 905 Other Textile Clothing Accessory - Constructed using skills learned in STEAM Clothing 3.

BEYOND THE NEEDLE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. LEVEL REQUIREMENTS – ONLY exhibitors in their first two years of Beyond the Needle may exhibit in classes 901 and 902. 3. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Exhibits not including supporting information will be lowered a ribbon placing.

35

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 221 BEYOND THE NEEDLE PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 1 Design Portfolio – Complete at least three different samples/activities from the project manual. The Portfolio should be placed in an

8 1/2 x 11, three-ring binder. Include an appropriate cover, dividers, and table of contents. (Additional pages can be added each year but should be dated.) See pages 14-16 for portfolio formatting.

CLASS 2 Color Wheel - Create your own color wheel, complimentary color bar or color scheme using pages 27-39 in the project manual. The Exhibit may be a notebook, poster, or small display. Exhibits should not exceed 22” x 30”.

CLASS 3 Embellished Garment with Original Design - Create a garment using intermediate or advanced techniques as defined in the project manual. Designs are the original idea of the 4-Her using the elements and principles of design to make an original statement.

CLASS 4 Original Designed Fabric Yardage - Fabric yardage is designed using techniques such as those found in the manual. Other embellishments may be added. Exhibit consists of at least one yard of finished fabric. Include information on how the fabric was designed – describe the process and materials used. If additional information is not included, exhibit will be lowered one ribbon placing.

CLASS 5 Garment Constructed from Original Designed Fabric - Fabric yardage is designed first, then a garment is constructed from that fabric. Other embellishments may be added. Include information on how the fabric was designed – describe the process and materials used. If additional information is not included, exhibit will be lowered one ribbon placing.

CLASS 6 Textile Arts Garment or Accessory - A garment or accessory constructed using new unconventional materials. Examples: rubber bands, plastic, duct tape. A description of the design process must accompany the entry.

CLASS 7 Fashion Accessory – An accessory designed and constructed using elements and principles of design; can be textile or non-textile based. Examples: shoes, bracelets, scarves, etc. A description of the design process must accompany the entry. If additional information is not included, exhibit will be lowered one ribbon placing.

CLASS 901 Beginning Embellished Garment – Create a garment using beginning techniques as defined in the project manual. Designs are the original idea of the 4-Her using the elements and principles of design to make an original statement.

CLASS 902 Beginning Textile Clothing Accessory – Accessory is constructed and/or decorated using techniques as defined in the project manual. Entry examples include: hats, bags, scarves, gloves, aprons, etc.

CLASS 903 Other Garment - Garment made using skills learned in Beyond the Needle. CLASS 904 Other Garment - Garment made using skills learned in Beyond the Needle. CLASS 905 Accessory - Accessory made using skills learned in Beyond the Needle. CLASS 906 Accessory - Accessory made using skills learned in Beyond the Needle.

KNITTING RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE UNIT of competition. 4-H members may enter a maximum of 3 items per class. 3. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Each knitted exhibit must include information answering the following questions on a half sheet of 8 ½” x 11”

paper placed with the entry tag. • What was you goal(s) in making this exhibit? (Example: learn how to block a garment or learn how to use two different yarns) • What steps did you take as you worked towards your goal(s)? • What were the most important things you learned as you worked towards your goal(s)? • What gauge was used? (Number of rows per inch, number of stitches per inch) • What size of needles did you use? • What kind of yarn did you use? (Weight and fiber content) • What is the name of the stiches you used? Additionally, entries must include a copy of the directions. Exhibits not including supporting information will be lowered a ribbon placing.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 225 KNITTING PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 900 Level 1 – Knitted Clothing or Home Environment Item CLASS 5 Level 2 – Knitted Clothing or Home Environment Item

Knitted items or garment(s) using pattern stitches such as diamond, block, twist or seed/moss stiches CLASS 15 Level 3 – Knitted Clothing or Home Environment Item

Knitted items or garment(s) made from advanced knitting stitches such as pass slip over, double-pointed needle knitting, cable, Turkish, tamerna, plait, germaine, feather, and fan or knitting with one or more patterns such as Aran or Fair Isle

CROCHET RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CLOTHING 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE UNIT of competition. 4-H members may enter a maximum of 3 items per class. 3. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Each crocheted exhibit must include information answering the following questions on a half sheet of 8 ½” x 11”

paper placed with the entry tag. • What was you goal(s) in making this exhibit? (Example: learn how to block a garment or learn how to use two different yarns) • What steps did you take as you worked towards your goal(s)? • What were the most important things you learned as you worked towards your goal(s)? • What gauge and size of hook was used? • What kind of yarn did you use? (Weight and fiber content) • What is the name of the stiches you used? Additionally, entries must include a copy of the directions. Exhibits not including supporting information will be lowered a ribbon placing.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 226 CROCHET PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 901 Level 1 – Crocheted Clothing or Home Environment Item CLASS 5 Level 2 – Crocheted Clothing or Home Environment Item

Crocheted item or garment using pattern stitches such as texture, shell, cluster, or mesh stitches CLASS 15 Level 3 – Crocheted Clothing or Home Environment Item

Crocheted item or garment using advanced crochet stitches such as afghan, broomstick, hairpin lace, design motifs, or pattern stitches

36

CONSUMER MANAGEMENT GENERAL RULES – CONSUMER MANAGEMENT 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. PROJECTS – Projects in the Consumer Management area include: Shopping in Style and My Financial Future 3. SHOPPING IN STYLE EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS – Exhibits shall meet the following size requirements:

• Posters shall be 14” x 22” • Notebooks must be 8 ½” x 11” x 1” 3-ring binders • Videos should be less than five minutes in length and be able to be played on a PC using Windows Media Player, Real Player, or QuickTime

Player. 4. MY FINANCIAL FUTURE EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS – Entries should be typed and then attached to a piece of colored card stock or colored

poster board (limit the size of the poster board or card stock to 14” x 22” or smaller). Front and back of the poster board may be used. 5. STATE FAIR AGE REQUIREMENTS – In Shopping in Style only exhibitors ages 10 and over may be selected to exhibit at the State Fair. Exhibits

must receive a purple ribbon at the County Fair in order to be eligible. 6. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in Shopping in Style and My Financial Future divisions. 7. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISIONS 240 SHOPPING IN STYLE PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.25 Red $2.50 White $1.75 CLASS 1 Best Buy for Your Buck (ages 8-13 before January 1 of the current year) - Provide details of the best buy you made for your buck this

year. Consider building the ultimate wardrobe by adding to this entry each year by dividing it into Year 1, Year 2, Year 3, etc. Put the story in a binder or video, no posters please (see general information above). Please do not include the Shopping in Style Fashion Show Information Sheet in your entry. Although both entries do share some information, there are differences in content and format for this class. Suggested for Ages 10-13 Provide details about wardrobe inventory, which indicates why you selected the garment you did, clothing budget, and cost of garment. Provide 3 color photos of you wearing the garment (front, side, back views).

CLASS 2 Best Buy for Your Buck (ages 14-18 before January 1 of the current year) - Provide details of the best buy you made for your buck this year. Consider building the ultimate wardrobe by adding to this entry each year by dividing it into Year 1, Year 2, Year 3, etc. Put the story in a binder or video, no posters please (see general information above). Please do not include the Shopping in Style Fashion Show Information Sheet in your entry. Although both entries do share some information, there are differences in content and format for this class. Suggested for Ages 14-19 Provide details listed for those ages 10-13 plus include body shape discussion, construction quality details, design features that affected your selection, cost per wearing, and care of garment. Provide 3 color photos of you wearing the garment (front, side, back views).

CLASS 3 Revive Your Wardrobe - Take at least two items in your wardrobe that still fits but that you don’t wear anymore and pair them with something new to make them wearable once again. Create a photo story that includes before and after photos and a description of what was done. Entry can be a poster, binder or video (see GENERAL RULES – CONSUMER MANAGEMENT #3).

CLASS 4 Show Me Your Colors - Select 6-8 color photos of you wearing different colors. Half should be what you consider to be good personal color choices and half should be poor personal color choices. Write a brief explanation with each photo describing your selections. Refer to the Shopping in Style manual page 23 for more information. Entry should be on a poster (see GENERAL RULES – CONSUMER MANAGEMENT #3).

CLASS 5 Clothing First Aid Kit - Refer to page 73 of the Shopping in Style manual and complete a clothing first aid kit. Include a list of items in the kit and a brief discussion of why each was included. Put in an appropriately sized box or tote with a lid. No larger than a shoebox.

CLASS 6 Mix, Match & Multiply - Using this concept from page 32 of the Shopping in Style manual take at least five pieces of clothing and create new outfits. Use your imagination to show various looks (i.e. on a clothes line, in a tree, or on a mannequin). Include a brief discussion of each outfit, which demonstrates what you have learned by completing this entry. Entry can be a poster, binder or video (see GENERAL RULES – CONSUMER MANAGEMENT #3).

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 247 MY FINANCIAL FUTURE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

BEGINNING/INTERMEDIATE CLASS 1 3 SMART Financial Goals – Write three SMART financial goals for yourself (one should be short term, one intermediate, and one long

term). Explain how you intend to reach each goal you set. CLASS 2 Income Inventory – Using page 13 as a guideline, list sources and amounts of income you earn/receive over a six month period. Answer

the following questions: What were your income sources? Where there any steady income sources? What did you do with the income you received? Include your income inventory in the exhibit.

CLASS 3 Tracking Expenses – Use an app or chart like the one on page 17 to track your spending over two months. Answer the following questions: What did you spend most of your money on? What did you learn about your spending habits? Will you make any changes in your spending based on what you learned? Why or why not? Include your chart in your exhibit.

CLASS 4 Money Personality Profile – Complete the money personality profile found on pages 21-22. Answer the following questions: What is your money personality? How does your money personality affect the way you spend/save money? Have a friend or family member complete the money personality profile. Compare and contrast (how are you alike and how are you different) your money personality profile with theirs.

CLASS 5 What Does It Really Cost? – Complete Activity 8 “What does it really cost?” on pages 39-40. CLASS 6 My Work; My Future – Interview three adults in your life about their career or jobs using the questions on page 51 and record these

answers. In addition, answer the following questions on your display: What did you find most interesting about these jobs? Were there any positions you might want to pursue as your career? Why/why not? What careers interest you at this point in your life? What are the steps you need to do now to prepare for this career?

INTERMEDIATE/ADVANCED CLASS 7 Pay – Interview someone who is paid a salary; someone who is paid a commission; and someone who is paid an hourly wage. Have the

answer the following questions plus any additional questions you may have: What are some of the benefits of receiving your pay the way you do (salary, commission, or hourly wage)? What are some negative outcomes for getting paid the way you do? Does your pay keep pace with inflation? Why do you think this? Summarize: Based upon your interviews, which payment method would suit you the best? Discuss your answer.

CLASS 8 The Cost of Not Banking – Type your answers to the questions about Elliot on page 50. CLASS 9 Evaluating Investment Alternatives – Complete the case study of Jorge on page 64. Answer all three questions at the bottom of the

page.

37

CLASS 10 Understanding Credit Scores – Watch the video and read the resources listed on page 71. Answer the following questions: Name 3 prudent actions that can reduce a credit card balance. What are the main factors that drive the cost of credit? List one personal financial goal that you could use credit or collateral to purchase. Discuss possible consequences that might happen with improper use of credit for your purchase.

CLASS 11 You Be the Teacher – Create an activity, story board, game or display that would teach another youth about the “Key Terms” listed on page 62. Activity/display must include at least five of the terms.

ENTREPRENEURSHIP GENERAL RULES – ENTREPRENEURSHIP 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE UNIT of competition. 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class. 4-H

members in ANY UNIT may also enter Class 6: Entrepreneurship Challenge. 3. LABELING – The 4-H member’s name, age, town, and county must be listed on the back of the exhibit. 4. EXHIBIT STANDARDS –

• Posters must be 14” x 22” and may be arranged either horizontally or vertically. • Posters may not use copyrighted materials, such as cartoon characters or commercial product names. • Posters may include photographs, charts or examples as well as a written explanation. • Posters may be laminated to protect them. • ALL exhibits which do not conform to size or content guidelines will be lowered one ribbon placing.

5. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the entrepreneurship division. 6. MANUALS – All entrepreneurship exhibits are directly related to the activities in the project manuals. Refer to the manual for ideas, suggestions,

and additional information to enhance project exhibits. Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISON 531 ENTREPRENEURSHIP PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

ESI: DISCOVER THE E-SCENE – UNIT 1 CLASS 1 Interview an Entrepreneur - Share what you learned from the person about starting and running a business or how they deliver

excellent customer service. How will what you have learned through this interview change your future plans or ways of thinking about business? (based on pages 2.1 - 2.4 of ESI Unit 1 manual). Submit a poster, see GENERAL RULES – ENTREPRENEURSHIP #4.

CLASS 910 Other Exhibit – Exhibit showcasing knowledge gained in ESI – Unit 1.

ESI: THE CASE OF ME – UNIT 2

CLASS 2 Social Entrepreneurship Presentation- Prepare a five-slide power point presentation about a social entrepreneurship event to benefit a group or individual in your community (social entrepreneurs are people who are in business to help others). Submit a print out of the note pages which show each slide and include an explanation of each slide. Enter exhibit in a report with fasteners (no slide bars) (refer to page 2.4 of ESI Unit 2 manual).

CLASS 920 Other Exhibit – Exhibit showcasing knowledge gained in ESI – Unit 2.

ESI: YOUR BUSINESS INSPECTON – UNIT 3 CLASS 3 Marketing Package (mounted on a 14" x 22" poster) must include at least three items (examples) developed by the 4-H’er from the

following list: business card, brochure, advertisement, business promotional piece, printout of an internet home page, packaging design, signs, logo design, direct mail piece, etc. The marketing package should be for an original business developed by the 4-H’er and not an existing business.

CLASS 4 Sample of an Original Product - Product with an information sheet (8 ½” x 11") answering the following questions (If exhibiting in both Division 531 Class 4 and Class 5 products must be entirely different products): • What did you enjoy the most about making the product? • What challenges did you have when making the product? Would you do anything differently next time? If so, what? • What is the suggested retail price of the product? How did you decide on the price? • Market analysis of the community – data gathered through a survey of potential customers. Use the three questions on page 3.3

of the ESI Unit 3 manual and survey at least 10 people in your community about your product. • How much would you earn per hour? Show how you determined this figure. • What is unique about this Product?

CLASS 5 Photos of an Original Product – (mounted on a 14” x 22” poster) must include three photos of developed product and a mounted information sheet answering the following questions (if exhibiting in both Division 531 Class 4 and Class 5 products must be entirely different products): • What did you enjoy the most about making the product? • What challenges did you have when making the product? Would you do anything differently next time? If so, what? • What is the suggested retail price of the product? How did you decide on the price? • Market analysis of the community – data gathered through a survey of potential customers. Use the three questions on page 3.3

of the ESI Unit 3 manual and survey at least 10 people in your community about your product. • How much would you earn per hour? Show how you determined this figure. • What is unique about this Product?

CLASS 930 Other Exhibit – Exhibit showcasing knowledge gained in ESI – Unit 3. ESI: YOUR BUSINESS INSPECTON – ALL UNITS

CLASS 6 Entrepreneurship Challenge – Take on the entrepreneurship challenge. The Entrepreneurship Challenge is open to 4-H members enrolled in any of the three ESI units. Complete five or more of the challenges from the following list. The exhibit will include highlights from these five challenges. Consider labeling each challenge so the viewer will understand what the challenge was. Enter a poster, video report, or scrapbook related to the learning from the challenge. Use your creativity to show what you learned. Select five challenges from the list below:

• Sell something. • Introduce yourself to a local entrepreneur and take a selfie with them. • Be a detective! Look for Nebraska-made products and find out more about the business. • Tour 2-3 entrepreneurial businesses and create a photo story. • Investigate what it takes to be an entrepreneur (Skills Assessment ESI 4.1).

38

• Make a prototype (sample/model) of a new product idea (Include the prototype of a photo of prototype). • Work with a friend to develop a new business idea! • Contact your local Extension Office to learn about entrepreneurship opportunities. • Create an activity to teach other about entrepreneurship (coloring page, puzzles, game, etc.).

HOME ENVIRONMENT GENERAL RULES – HOME ENVIRONMENT 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members may enter ONLY ONE EXHIBIT PER CLASS. 3. HOME ENVIRONMENT EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS –

• ALL items MUST be designed to be used for home decorating, home furnishing, or home management. • Accessories should be of high quality and suitable for use in the home several months throughout the year. Holiday specific items is

discouraged. • Entering delicate, breakable, or valuable items is highly discouraged. • Items entered that are NOT for home decorating (clothing, purses, note cards, toys, scrapbooks/photo albums, etc.) will NOT BE JUDGED. • Exhibits made from prepackaged kits will NOT be accepted. Kits are defined as any prepackaged item where the materials and design are

predetermined by the manufacturer. • Articles that use pattern or pictures from magazines or websites as a starting point are acceptable. • Exhibits may be no taller than seven feet and no wider than six feet. ALL exhibits must be able to be easily lifted by two people.

4. LABELING – All pieces of a Home Environment exhibit should be labeled with the exhibitor’s name and county. 5. SUPPORTING INFORMATION –

• Supporting information is required ALL Home Environment exhibits. • Attach information to explain steps taken. • Information must also include element or principle of design used. • Any exhibits not providing the required supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing.

6. EVALUATION CRITERIA – • Item must be designed to be used for home decorating, home furnishing, or home management (NO clothing, purses, note cards, toys,

scrapbooks/photo albums, etc.) • Accessories should be of high quality (as compared to quick, simple crafts), suitable for use in the home several months throughout the year.

Holiday specific items are discouraged. • Items should show creativity and originality, along with the application of design principles and elements. Youth are required to include the

design elements and principles they used along with simple directions for how they made their project with their exhibit. Information on the elements and principles of design may be found in the project manuals.

• Entered in the correct class (ask yourself: What medium is the majority of your accessory made from? What was changed or manipulated?) • Items should be ready for display in the home (pictures framed, wall hangings and pictures ready to hang, etc.) No single mat board or artist

canvas panels. Wrapped canvas (if staples not visible on edge) will be accepted without framing, but still needs to include hanger. MAKE SURE HANGERS ARE STRONG ENOUGH TO SUPPORT THE ITEM!

• Items should NOT be ones made for another project (i.e. STEAM Clothing 1 pillows, woodworking, etc.) 7. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in Design My Place, Sketchbook Crossroads, Heirloom

Treasures, Design Decisions, and Portfolio Pathways. 8. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 251 DESIGN MY PLACE PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 901 Batik or Tie Dye Home Accessory - For your room or home Batik may be a one-color batik; multi-color batik; quilted batik;

combination of tie and dye and batik; or nine-patch design and batik. CLASS 902 Needlework Item (Needlepoint, embroidery, etc.) CLASS 903 Simple Fabric Home Accessory (pillow, laundry bag, pillow case, table runner, etc.) CLASS 904 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Wood CLASS 905 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Plastic CLASS 906 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Glass CLASS 907 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Clay CLASS 908 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Paper CLASS 909 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Metal Tooling or Metal Punch CLASS 910 Simple Home Accessory Made Using Recycled Materials CLASS 910 Simple Outdoor Home Accessory CLASS 911 Other Simple Home Accessory CLASS 912 Wall Hanging – For your room or home CLASS 913 Bulletin or Message Board CLASS 914 Storage Item (box or rack) - For use in any area of the home. Item might also be made to store items for reuse and recycling. CLASS 915 Recycled Storage Item (box or rack) - For use in any area of the home. Must be constructed using recycled materials. CLASS 916 Scale Drawing of Wall Arrangement - Poster (approximately 22” x 28”) showing scale drawing of a wall elevation with plans for a

wall arrangement. Indicate the scale used. Label furniture and other room features. Through the use of dotted lines and captions, show how the guides to wall arrangements were used. Poster will be judged for both content and visual presentation.

CLASS 917 Problem Solved – Use a creative method to show how you solved a problem (air quality, water, sound, temperature, lighting, fire escape plan, etc.)

CLASS 918 You Be the Teacher Video – Video showing what you learned in this project (ex. How to make a bed, organize a room, or the steps you used to make your simple accessory)

CLASS 919 Other Item - A different finished item made in this project CLASS 920 Other Item - A different finished item made in this project

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 260 SKETCHBOOK CROSSROADS NOTE: Use techniques from manual or comparable techniques. Attach information to explain steps taken. Information must also include element or principle of design use (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 8 - 9).

39

PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 1 Original Pencil or Chalk Drawing - Framed and ready to hang; attach description of technique used. Scratch art accepted in this

class (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 10 – 21) CLASS 2 Original Ink Drawing - Framed and ready to hand; attach description of technique used. (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages

22 – 28) CLASS 3 Home Accessory Made with Fiber (Sketchbook Crossroads manual page 29) CLASS 4 Home Accessory Made with Felted Wool (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 29 – 33) CLASS 5 Home Accessory Made with Cotton Linter (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 34 – 36) CLASS 6 Home Accessory Using Batik (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 37 – 39) CLASS 7 Home Accessory Made by Weaving (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 40 – 47) CLASS 8 Home Accessory Made with Fabric the Exhibitor has Dyed (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages 48 – 50) CLASS 9 Original Sculpted or Thrown Home Accessory Made with Clay - (NO purchased pots) (Sketchbook Crossroads manual pages

53 – 62) CLASS 901 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Sketchbook Crossroads CLASS 902 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Sketchbook Crossroads

PRESERVING HEIRLOOM RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HOME ENVIRONMENT 2. PROJECT PURPOSE – This project is for items with historic, sentimental or antique value that are restored, repurposed or

refinished to keep their original look and value. It is NOT for “recycled” items. Example: a bench would be considered a heirloom if the original finish is restored, but if decorated by painting it would be considered recycled. Entering highly valuable item (especially small ones) is discouraged, as exhibits are not displayed in closed cases.

3. SUPPORTING INFORMATION - Supporting information is required for Heirloom Treasures. Any exhibits not providing the required supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing. Information sheet must include: • List of steps taken to complete your project. Before and after pictures are encouraged. • Keepsakes documentation: How you acquired the item and the history of the item – may be written, pictures, audio or video tape of interview

with family member, etc.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 256 PRESERVING HEIRLOOMS PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 1 Trunks - Including doll sized trunks or wardrobes CLASS 2 An Article – Either a repurposed “treasure” (accessory) from an old item or an old “treasure” (accessory) refinished or renovated.

May include a display of a collection or collectibles, being careful not to destroy the value of the collection. CLASS 3 Furniture - Either a repurposed “treasure” from an old item or an old “treasure” refinished or renovated. May include doll-sized

furniture. CLASS 4 Cleaned and Restored Heirloom Accessory or Furniture- A reconditioned and cleaned old piece of furniture or accessory that is

functional for use or display. Item might be cleaned and waxed and simple repairs made. Item would not have to be refinished or repainted but reconditioned to restore it to its original look or to prevent it from further damage as a valuable heirloom (refinished items go in classes 2-3). This class is for situations where it may be best to do very little to the item to maintain its antique value. Item or article should be of complexity suited to an advanced level project

CLASS 901 Other Item - A different finished item made in this project

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 257 DESIGN DECISIONS NOTE: For Classes 15 – 18 determine entry by what medium was manipulated. PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 1 Design Board for a Room - Posters (22” x 28”) or multimedia presentation (on CD)

Include: color scheme, wall treatment, floor treatment, etc. OR floor plan for a room. Show what you learned with before and after pictures or diagrams, samples, story, cost comparisons, optional arrangements, etc.

CLASS 2 Problem Solved OR Career Exploration • Identify a problem (as problem windows, storage needs, inconvenient room arrangement, etc.) OR • Explore a career related to home environment. (what would it be, what education is needed, what would you do, etc.) • Using poster, notebook, multimedia presentation (on CD) or other method, describe the problem and how it was solved OR

your career exploration CLASS 3 Solar, Wind, or Other Energy Alternatives for the Home - Can be models, either an original creation or an adaption of kit. If kit,

label and explain what was learned and how the item could be used in or on exterior of home. CLASS 4 Technology in Design – Incorporate technology into a project related to home environment; for example, use conductive thread to

create a circuit that enhances a wall hanging. CLASS 5 Community Service Activity – Show what was done as a community service activity related to this project. In a notebook, photo

story, or poster, show the purpose and results of that activity (ex. Painting a mural at a daycare or 4-H building, helping an elderly person paint or clean their home, etc.) May be an individual or club activity.

CLASS 6 Window Covering – May include curtains, draperies, shades, shutters, etc. CLASS 7 Floor Covering - May be woven, braided, painted floor cloth, etc. May be exhibited as a poster or multimedia presentation (on CD) CLASS 8 Bedcover - May include quilts, comforters, bedspreads, dust ruffles, pillow shams, canopies, etc. For quilts, state who did the

quilting. NO TIED FLEECE BLANKETS! CLASS 9 Accessory – Framed Original Needlework/Stitchery - Original needlework/stitchery. May be commercially framed. CLASS 10 Accessory – Textile 2D - Tablecloth or runner, dresser scarf, wall hanging, etc. NO TIED FLEECE BLANKETS OR 10-MINUTE

TABLE RUNNERS! CLASS 11 Accessory – Textile 3D - Pillows, pillow shams, fabric bowls, etc. CLASS 12 Accessory – Other 2D CLASS 13 Accessory – Other 3D – String art, wreaths, etc. CLASS 14 Accessory – Original Floral Design - Original floral design. CLASS 15 Accessory – Original Made from Wood – burn, cut, shape or otherwise manipulate CLASS 16 Accessory – Original Made from Glass – etch, mosaic, stain, molten or otherwise manipulate CLASS 17 Accessory – Original Made from Metal – cut, shape, punch, sculpt, reassemble or otherwise manipulate CLASS 18 Accessory – Original Made from Ceramic or Tile – Treatment to exhibit must go through process that permanently alters the

medium. Painting alone is not sufficient.

40

CLASS 19 Accessory – Recycled/Upcycled Item for the Home - Reuse a common object or material in a creative way. Include description of what was done to recycle or reuse item in your attached information.

CLASS 20 Furniture – Recycled/Remade – made or finished by using a common object or material in a creative way. Include description of what was done to recycle or reuse item in your attached information.

CLASS 21 Furniture – Wood Opaque Finish (such as paint or enamel) CLASS 22 Furniture – Wood Clear Finish (showing wood grain) CLASS 23 Furniture – Fabric Covered - May include stool, chair, seat, slip cover, headboards, etc. CLASS 24 Furniture – Outdoor Living – Furniture made/refurbished suitable for outdoor use. CLASS 25 Accessory – Outdoor Living – Accessory made/refurbished by 4-H member suitable for outdoor use. I CLASS 901 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Design Decisions. CLASS 902 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Design Decisions.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 261 PORTFOLIO PATHWAYS NOTE: Use techniques from manual or comparable techniques. Attach information to explain steps taken. Information must also include element or principle of design use (Portfolio Pathways manual pages 8 - 9). PREMIUM Purple $3.00 Blue $2.50 Red $2.00 White $1.50 CLASS 1 Original Acrylic Painting - Based on techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways, framed and ready to hang. CLASS 2 Original Oil Painting - Based on techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways, framed and ready to hang. CLASS 3 Original Watercolor - Based on techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways, framed and ready to hang. CLASS 4 Original Sand Painting - Based on techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways, framed and ready to hang. CLASS 5 Original Encaustic Painting - Based on techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways, framed and ready to hang. CLASS 6 Home Accessory - Made with any printing technique in Portfolio Pathways. CLASS 7 Nebraska Life Exhibit - An art exhibit using one of the techniques in the above classes to show how art can define a sense

of place, or life in Nebraska. For example - a pencil or ink drawing depicting life in Nebraska, using natural resources such as native grasses to make a weaving, using natural fibers for felting, or using roots, nuts, plants or flowers to dye fabric. Include the required information listed above and how this project represents life in Nebraska.

CLASS 901 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways CLASS 902 Other Item - A different finished item made using the skills and techniques learned in Portfolio Pathways

QUILT QUEST GENERAL RULES – QUILT QUEST 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE LEVEL of competition. 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class. 3. QUILT QUEST EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS –

• A quilt is made up of at least three layers. Quilts or quilted items must be quilted or tied though all layers • NO FLEECE BLANKETS

4. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – All Quilt Quest quilt exhibits must include a half sheet of paper with answers to the following questions: • Where did you get the idea for your item? • What have you done and what was done by others? • What ideas do you have for your next quilting project? • What elements or principles of design did you use? • What steps did you take to complete the project? Any exhibits not providing the required supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing.

5. GUIDELINES FOR QUILTS – • Note the description of classes. They denote the degree of difficulty in construction and not the number of years in the project • All quilted exhibits must be clean and finished for the intended purpose • A quilted exhibit consists of 3 or more layers • All quilted exhibits must be quilted (machine or hand) or tied • All quilt piecing and finishing must be sole work of the 4-H member • Quilting, whether machine or hand, may be done by another individual except in the Premier Quilt Class • No pre-quilted fabric may be used • Wall quilts must have a hanging sleeve on the back of the quilt or some method for hanging • All quilts must be clean and finished for the intended purpose. • All quilted exhibits must have a permanent label on the back in the bottom right corner with the quilter’s name and date of completion • Judging of quilts will be within the following quilt sizes:

Small – Maximum length + width = up to 60” (this class includes miniature quilts, wall hangings, table runners, placemats (4), and pillows. All items must be quilted. Pillows must have a quilted top, not just pieced patchwork.) Medium – Maximum length + width = 61” to 120” Large – Maximum length + width = over 120”

• FABRIC - For all classes, 4-Hers can choose fabrics for the quilt by selecting fabric from fabric bolts. 4-Hers may also use “fabric collections” offered by manufacturers in a particular designer or fabric line. Examples of fabric collections include: Jelly Rolls are made of (up to) 40 different strips of 2 ½” wide fabric laying on top of one another and rolled up to look like a jelly roll. The fabric is created by one designer or fabric line and compliments each other. In many cases, less skilled 4-Hers find it difficult to cut narrow strips with a rotary cutter and ruler, so this fabric selection may make it easier as they learn. Honey Buns are made like the Jelly Rolls with 1 ½” strips of fabrics. Layer Cakes are 10" squares of fabric from a manufactured designer or fabric line with different pieces of fabric “layered” on top of one another to look like a piece of cake. Charm Packs are made of 5" squares of coordinating fabric and may be tied up with a string or scrap of fabric. Candies are 2 ½” squares of fabric from a manufactured designer or fabric line. Turnover is a collection of coordinating fabrics that are cut into 6” triangles. Fat Quarters are ½ yard cuts of fabric which are cut in half to make a rectangle that is approximately 18” x 21” One half yard of fabric yields 2 fat quarters), the “fat quarter” can be more economical to purchase for a smaller quilt because the purchaser does not have to buy the entire yardage width.

41

Fabric Kit is a collection of fabrics cut in large pieces to accommodate the requirements of a particular quilt pattern. The 4-Her must cut out all of the smaller squares, rectangles, etc. to make the quilt top according to the pattern directions.

• After fabric selection, youth can use a variety tools for cutting the fabric and completing the quilt. Cutting into pattern pieces may include hand roller die cutting machines that cut particular shapes which can be appliqued to fabric.

6. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Quilt Quest Division. 7. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT C DIVISION 229 QUILT QUEST PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.25 Red $2.50 White $1.75 CLASS 10 Exploring Quilts - Illustrate some aspect of quilts or quilt making (examples include, but are not limited to, language arts, quilts of

different cultures, chemistry, design, preservation, history (history may include history of an old quilt or history/research of a particular style of quilt such as Baltimore album quilts, Amish quilts, etc.), construction, math-conversion of quilt patterns, textiles/fabrics, computerization, entrepreneurship). Exhibit may include a 14” x 22” poster, notebook, CD, Power Point presentation, DVD, or other technique. All items in an exhibit must be attached together and labeled. NO quilted items should be entered in this class.

CLASS 20 Quilt Designs Other Than Fabric - Two or three-dimensional item with quilt design made using medium other than fabric, such as stained glass, paper, etc. Must include supporting information (see above).

CLASS 21 Barn Quilt – Less than 4’ x 4’. Must include supporting information (see above). CLASS 22 Barn Quilt – Greater than 4’ x 4’. Must include supporting information (see above). CLASS 30 Computer Exploration - Poster or notebook with a minimum of six computer generated quilt designs or color variations on a quilt

design. Include information of type of program used, process used to generate designs, or how you used color to create different quilt designs.

CLASS 40 Wearable Art - Quilted clothing or accessory. Must have a recognizable amount of quilting and may include fabric manipulation (he quilting must be done by 4-H member). On a half sheet of 8 ½” x 11” sheet of paper, tell how you selected the design and fabrics including whether or not you used a kit, jelly roll, charm squares, etc.

CLASS 41 Inter-Generational Quilt - A quilt made by a 4-H youth and family members or friends of different generations. On a half-sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper, answer the following questions: 1. How was the quilt planned and who did what in the construction of the quilt? 2. How did you select and design the fabrics including whether or not you used a kit, jelly roll, charm squares, etc.? 3. What did you learn that you can use on your next project?

CLASS 42 Service Project Quilt - A quilt that has been constructed by 4-H member or group to be donated to a worthy cause, On a half sheet of 8 ½ “ x 11” paper, answer the following questions: 1. Why was the quilt constructed and who will receive the donated quilt? 2. How did you select the design and fabrics used including whether or not you used a kit, jelly roll, charm squares, etc.? 3. What did you do and what was done by others? 3. What did you learn that you can use on your next project?

QUILT QUEST – LEVEL I (Pieced quilts are made up of squared and/or rectangles. See GENERAL RULES – QUILT QUEST #5 for guidelines.)

CLASS 50 Small Quilt CLASS 51 Medium Quilt CLASS 52 Large Quilt

QUILT QUEST – LEVEL II (In addition to squares and rectangles, quilts may have triangles, and/or may be embroidered. See GENERAL RULES – QUILT QUEST #5 for guidelines.) CLASS 60 Small Quilt CLASS 61 Medium Quilt CLASS 62 Large Quilt

QUILT QUEST – LEVEL III (In addition to any of the methods in Levels I and II, quilts may have curved piecing, applique, Celtic style, stained glass style, paper piecing, art quilt style, or other non-traditional styles. See GENERAL RULES – QUILT QUEST #5 for guidelines.) CLASS 70 Small Quilt CLASS 71 Medium Quilt CLASS 72 Large Quilt

QUILT QUEST – PREMIER QUILT (The entire quilt is the sole work of the 4-H member, including quilting (hand or machine). The 4-H member may receive guidance, but no one else may work on the quilt. NO TIED QUILTS in this class. See GENERAL RULES – QUILT QUEST #5 for guidelines.) CLASS 80 Premier Quilt – Hand Quilted CLASS 81 Premier Quilt – Sewing Machine Quilted CLASS 82 Premier Quilt – Long Arm Quilted – Non-Computerized/hand guided CLASS 83 Premier Quilt – Long Arm Quilted – Computerized

ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION & EARTH SCIENCE (WILDLIFE CONTEST, CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE EXHIBITS, SHOOTING SPORTS CONTESTS, ENTOMOLOGY, FORESTRY)

WILDLIFE CONTEST GENERAL RULES – WILDLIFE CONTEST 1. ELIGIBILITY - All currently enrolled 4-H members are eligible to participate in the wildlife contest regardless of projects carried. 2. PRE-ENTRY - Participants must pre-enter for the Johnson County Wildlife Contests by contacting the Extension Office and signing up by

closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. 3. AWARDS - All participants will receive ribbons. Additionally, the participants with the top three scores in each division will receive special

recognition. 4. CONTEST CATEGORIES – The Wildlife Contest consists of identifying pictures, specimens, etc. in seven different areas. Areas include: Bird,

Fish, Insects & Arachnids, Mammals, Reptiles & Amphibians, and Wildlife Tracks.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 500 WILDLIFE CONTEST PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 904 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 905 Intermediate Division 10 to 13 years of age CLASS 906 Junior Division 8 to 9 years of age

CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. PURPOSE OF EXHIBITS - Exhibitors are encouraged to show evidence of their personal field experiences, study, or observations that relate to

their exhibit. This helps judges understand what the 4-H'er did and learned in the process that led to the exhibit.

42

3. CITATIONS & REFERENCES – Show proper credit by listing the sources of plans or other supporting information used in exhibits. 4. LABELING – The exhibitor's name, county, and age must be on the back or bottom of all displays so that the owner can be identified even if the

entry tag becomes separated from the exhibit. 5. WILDLIFE & WILDLIFE LAWS – “Animal" or "wildlife" in the following instructions includes wild fish, amphibians, reptiles, birds, or mammals.

Follow wildlife laws; example: wildlife laws do not allow collection of bird nests, eggs, or any of their parts. 6. BOARD & POSTER EXHIBITS –

• These are displays that show educational information about a topic of interest. • Board exhibits can hold objects such as fishing equipment or casts of animal tracks. • Mount all board exhibits on 1/4 ” plywood, masonite, or similar panel no larger than 24” x 24”. • Poster exhibits should be on regular poster sheets, no larger than standard size (22” x 28”) but half size, 22” x 14”, is recommended

7. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Supporting information is required for most Conservation & Wildlife area exhibits. Please read the class description carefully to determine what additional information is required. Any exhibits not providing the required supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing.

8. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Conservation and Wildlife Area. 9. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

WILDLIFE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE 2. ANIMAL DISPLAY – Classes 1-4 Classes 1-4 are board or poster exhibits (see GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE #6 for

guidelines). Display may show any aspect of wildlife, wildlife habitat, or related conservation, restoration, or management (examples: life history or other facts about one type of wildlife; how to manage wildlife on a farm or in town; managing habitat for one kind of wildlife; life requirements for one kind of wildlife during one season or through the year; wildlife study methods; wildlife behavior (example: when nesting, finding food, moving, etc.); habitats (examples: grasslands, wetlands, river or stream corridors) and what wildlife is found there; habitat needs for a specific kind of wildlife.) For more ideas, refer to project manuals.

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 340 WILDLIFE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4

Mammal Display – (See WILDLIFE RULES #2 for instruction) Bird Display - (See WILDLIFE RULES #2 for instruction) Fish Display - (See WILDLIFE RULES #2 for instruction) Reptile or Amphibian Display - (See WILDLIFE RULES #2 for instruction)

CLASS 5 Wildlife Connections- Board or poster exhibit (see GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE #6 for guidelines). The purpose of this display is to show interconnections and related aspects among animals, plants, and other habitat components. All displays should show two or more interactions (connections) that occur between/among animals or between animals and their habitat. Displays might show how animals interact with other animals, with people, or with their habitat (examples: 1. Food chain display. Use pictures, drawings, or other items to illustrate the source of food energy and where it goes - who eats whom or what. Use arrows to show the direction of the energy (food) flow. 2. Show the role of predators, scavengers, insect eaters, or others in nature. 3. Show how wildlife numbers (populations) change through the year or with their habitat. 4. Show predation, competition, or other behavioral interactions of wildlife. 5. Choose one kind of wildlife and make observations through a season or year, keep notes of interactions, then make a display of what you saw.) For more ideas, refer to project manuals.

CLASS 6 Wildlife Tracks - Board or diorama-type box exhibit. Make a display of animal tracks using plaster-of-Paris casts. There are two options (choose one). For both options, include a brief description of your experiences in making the tracks so the judges better understand what you did and learned. Positive casts (impressions as they would be in nature) are preferred. Option 1: should show plaster-of-Paris tracks of five or more kinds of wildlife along with a picture or illustration of each kind of animal. Option 2: should show two or more plaster-of-Paris tracks of one specific kind of wildlife and should include a picture or illustration of the animal, what the animal may eat, and what may eat the animal. Option 3: should show two tracks and include the animal’s habitat needs including preferred food, shelter, water and space in addition to a picture or illustration of the animal.

CLASS 7 Wildlife Knowledge Check - Use electrical circuits, pictures, or other methods of teaching wildlife identification or other wildlife related knowledge. Plan size and shape to fit transportation and display; maximum size 24” x 24” (example: prepare a list of animals and questions about where each would most likely live. Rabbits-brushy areas along field borders; ducks-marshes, etc.)

CLASS 8 Wildlife Diorama - Box must be no larger than 24" x 24". The exhibit might show a grassland, prairie, agricultural, woodland, riparian (stream or river corridor), wetland, and/or other area with wildlife habitat (example: show a large unbroken grassland or prairie for species such as meadowlarks, greater prairie-chicken, lark bunting, grasshopper sparrows, Ferruginous hawk, burrowing owl, horned lark, upland sandpiper, or pronghorn; AND/OR show an area interspersed with several habitats such as windbreaks, farm fields, woods, waste areas, ditches, and pastures for edge-adapted species such as white-tailed deer, Northern bobwhite, mourning doves, cottontail rabbits, fox, squirrels, Northern cardinals, or blue jays). Label the habitats displayed and show at least five kinds of wildlife in their proper habitats.

CLASS 9 Wildlife Essay - Learn how to share educational information by writing. Choose a conservation or wildlife topic that interests you and write an essay about it. For example, write about a particular species of wildlife that you have observed or about the values of wildlife. You might write about wildlife on a farm, in town, in a backyard, at a backyard feeder, or at other places. You might write about hunting, fishing, or ethics and proper behavior for hunting or fishing. For other ideas, refer to project booklets. The essay should be between 100 and 1000 words long and should be typed, double spaced, or written so that it can be easily read. Standard size paper (8 ½ x 11) format is preferred. You might use books, magazines, or personal interviews as resources, but you must give credit to all sources by listing them.

CLASS 10 Wildlife Values Scrapbook - Make a scrapbook about the various values of wildlife following guidelines in the Wildlife Conservation project booklet (4-H 125).

CLASS 11 Wildlife Arts - The purpose of this class is to allow artistic exhibits that contain educational information about conservation and wildlife (examples might include paintings, photographs, wood carvings, painted duck decoys, or songs or poems written by the exhibitor). Entries must be appropriate for fair display and no larger than 24" x 24". Paintings or photographs should be displayed in notebook format or mounted on a sturdy display panel. All entries must include a title and brief explanation of the purpose or message (what is the exhibit meant to show).

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 342 WILDLIFE HABITAT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

43

CLASS 1 Houses - Make a house for wildlife (examples: bird house (bluebird, purple martin, wood duck, kestrel, barn owl, etc.) or bat house; NO insect houses). Make the house functional so that dimensions, hole size etc. are appropriate to fit the intended species' needs. Include the following information: 1. The kinds of animal(s) for which the house is intended; 2. Where and how the house should be located for best use; 3. Any seasonal maintenance needed.

CLASS 2 Feeders/Waters - Make a bird bath or feeder (examples: seed, suet, or nectar feeders. Squirrel feeder okay; NO insect feeders). Indicate the kinds of animal(s) for which the feeder or waterer is intended. Make the feeder or waterer functional so that it fits wildlife needs. Include the following information: 1. Where and how the feeder or waterer should be located for best use; 2. How it should be maintained.

CLASS 3 Wildlife Habitat Design - Board or poster exhibit (see GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE #6 for guidelines). Choose a backyard, acreage, or farm, and design a habitat plan to meet the food, water, shelter, and space needs of at least three kinds of animals you would like to attract. Draw an outline of the area and show what plants or other habitat will be provided. Indicate how the various parts of your plan provide the desired habitat needs. You might include an aerial photo of the area if you have one. For ideas, check the Wildlife Habitat Evaluation Handbook, Participant's Manual (NE 4H4300).

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 343 HARVESTING EQUIPMENT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Fish Harvesting Equipment - Board exhibit (see GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE #6 for guidelines). Display of

equipment used in fish harvesting (examples: fishing knots, hooks (with corks over ends for safety), lures). Label all items displayed. Include in your exhibit the following information: 1. The purpose of each item; 2. When or where each item is used in relation to other equipment; 3. Any personal experiences you've had with the item(s).

CLASS 2 Build a Fishing Rod - Build your own fishing rod for exhibit and for fishing use. Rod building blanks and kits with instructions are available for this purpose. A fishing rod educational exhibit may not exceed 96 inches in length. Exhibit must be mounted on a board and labeled with the member’s name, county, and class number. Include with the exhibit the following information as a brief attachment: explanation of cost of materials/components, where materials/components were purchased, how made, and number of hours required for construction; identify all parts (necessary components, which must be included are grip, line guides (based on manufacturers specifications), guide wraps, and hook keeper.) Reel seat needs to be aligned with guides, and guides aligned accurately down rod. Guide wraps of size A to D, nylon or silk thread. Exhibit will be judged on: workmanship, labeling of parts (guides, etc.), correct information, and neatness.

CLASS 3 Casting Target - Make a casting target for exhibit and use, following guidelines in: Fishing for Adventure Helper’s Guide (NATL4H 07601)

CLASS 4 Wildlife Harvesting Equipment - Board exhibit (see GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE #6 for guidelines). Display of equipment used in harvesting wildlife (examples: expended ammunition casings (no live ammunition permitted), steel traps, hide stretchers, fleshers, etc.) For displays of shotguns, rifles, or bows, use drawings or pictures. Label all items displayed. Include in your exhibit the following information: Label all items displayed. Include in your exhibit the following information: 1. The purpose of each item; 2. When or where each item is used in relation to other equipment; 3. Any personal experiences you've had with the item(s).

CLASS 5 Inventing Wildlife/Fish Harvesting Equipment, Aid or Accessory – Use engineering principles to invent or adapt equipment that helps you harvest fish or wildlife. This could include: wildlife calls, adapted fishing pole for shallow water, a blind, decoys, etc. Share your drawing (or adapted plans), how the equipment works, how you tested it, and the results of testing your prototype, and any adjustments you made.

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 346 TAXIDERMY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Tanned Hides or Taxidermy - Any legal fish, bird, or other wild animal properly processed by the member. No requirement as to size

or mounting. Include the following information: 1. The animal's name; 2. Information about the exhibitor's personal field experiences, study, or observations that relate to the exhibit.

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 361 OTHER NATURAL RESOURCES PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Design Your Own Exhibit in Natural Resources, Conservation or Ecology - This class is for educational exhibits about natural

resources, conservation, wildlife, or ecology that do not fit into other categories. Entries must be appropriate for fair display and no larger than 24” x 24”. All entries must include a title and should be clear (a brief explanation or other method) about the intended purpose or message – what the exhibit is meant to show. Think about accuracy, creativity, educational value for viewers, and evidence of exhibitor’s personal experiences and learning.

SHOOTING SPORTS SHOOTING SPORTS STATIC EXHIBIT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – CONSERVATION & WILDLIFE 2. FIREARMS – No firearms may be exhibited. However, information can be shared through pictures. 3. SHARP ITEMS - ALL SHARP ITEMS must be enclosed in a plexiglass display case. Display cases must be 12” wide x 18” long x 4” deep and

displayed so judges can open them to examine the items. Items must be secured in the case. 4. IDENTIFICATION - All equipment exhibited must be personally identified (engraved or registered for insurance purposes) by the exhibitor before

exhibiting. Name and address should be on the back of the exhibit 5. SUPPORTING MATERIALS – Any exhibit lacking supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing. 6. DANGEROUS EXHIBITS - Any exhibit that is deemed dangerous or improperly prepared will be refused entry, based on the decision of the check

in superintendent(s) and/or Extension Staff.

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 347 SHOOTING SPORTS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Shooting Aid or Accessory – Any item which helps the shooter/hunter better perform their sport, examples: rifle sling, kneeling roll,

arm guard, shotgun vest, target boxes, shooting stick, etc. Include your design, or plans you adapted, what the item is and used for. CLASS 2 Storage Case – an item with the purpose to safely hold a firearm, bow, ammunition, and/or arrows, examples: soft sided shotgun

case, quivers, firearm safe, Include your design, or plans you adapted. Explain how the storage case is used. CLASS 3 Practice Game or Activity – invent or adapt an activity to practice or teach a project skill. Include pictures of youth playing the game,

testimonials for 4-H members who played the game, what skill is being worked on, and directions for the game. Explain how you came up with the game or adapted it to fit the needs of your group members.

CLASS 4 Science, Engineering, Technology Advancements of Shooting Sports Essay or Display – Choose a specific area of shooting sports and share how it has advanced, include a timeline and photos or illustrations. Keep your topic narrow and manageable. Essays are limited to 1000 words and should be on 8 ½ x 11 paper.

44

CLASS 5 Healthy Lifestyles Plan – Include a shooter’s diet and exercise plan, and how the 4-H member will benefit or improve from following the plan. Ideally, the 4-H member would follow the plan and include some journal entries about adaptions or improvements made while following the plan.

CLASS 6 Citizenship/Leadership Project – Share a display on a citizenship project or leadership project the 4-H member took on individually or with a group to improve some aspect related to 4-H Shooting Sports. Examples could be range development, conservation planting to attract wildlife, a camp, 4-H recruitment event. Include who benefitted from the project, what the 4-H member’s role was, and any results.

CLASS 8 Career Development/College Essay, Interview or Display – Research opportunities for careers related to this area or opportunities for college majors or college activities to help discover using project skills beyond a person’s 4-H career. Essays are limited to 1000 words and should be on 8 ½ x 11 paper. Interviews need to include a picture of the interviewee in their work setting, questions asked, and a transcript of answers.

CLASS 9 Community Vitality Display – Explore the difference shooting sports and hunting make in keeping Nebraska vibrant especially in rural areas. Present facts and research in an interesting way for the public to learn from.

CLASS 10 Ag Literacy-Value Added Agriculture Interview or Research Project – Explore how traditional ag producers are adding value to their production agriculture operations through conservation efforts, hunting, raising pheasants, shooting sports related tourism, etc. Present finding in an interesting way for the public to learn from.

CLASS 905 Educational Safety Poster - Poster concerning archery, rifle, pistol, shotgun, or wildlife and/or hunting.

GENERAL RULES – SHOOTING SPORTS CONTESTS 1. ENROLLMENT - 4-H members participating in the 4-H Shooting Sports project must be under the direct supervision of a certified 4-H Shooting

Sports instructor. 2. EQUIPMENT - Participants must provide their own gun, safety glasses, earplugs, and other required equipment (unless otherwise noted). Guns

used for competition are to be carried in a box or case. 3. DRESS CODE - Participants must wear an approved 4-H t-shirt for the county contests. During severe weather conditions required 4-H attire

shall be at the discretion of the contest superintendent. 4. PERMISSION WAIVER - Parents/guardians must sign a permission waiver and submit it to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on

June 15 in order to participate in the county shooting sports contests. 5. HUNTER EDUCATION - 4-H members participating in shotgun disciplines must have completed Firearm Hunter Education. A copy of their card

certifying completion must be submitted to the Johnson County Extension Office by close on date specified by the Extension Office in order to participate in the county contest.

6. UNSAFE PRACTICE - Participants exhibiting unsafe practices may be disqualified from the contest at the discretion of the superintendent.

BB GUN CONTEST RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SHOOTING SPORTS 2. NRA RULE BOOK – The Johnson County 4-H BB Gun Contest will follow the NRA 5 meter BB gun rules. 3. GUNS – Only smooth bore guns will be allowed. If air rifles are used during the BB Gun Contest, they are limited to 2 pumps. 4. CONTEST OVERVIEW – Ten shots will be fired from 5 meters in the following positions: prone, standing, sitting, kneeling (fired in this order) for

a total of 40 shots. Male and female contestants will compete together. 5. TIME LIMIT – Each contestant will be allowed 10 minutes for record shots plus sighters per target. 6. TARGETS – NRA 12 bull (10 bulls plus 2 sighters) targets will be used. Contestants will fire one shot at each bull. Each contestant will be issued

all targets before the match and is responsible for posting them. 7. EQUIPMENT – Participants must provide their own gun, BBs, and safety glasses. Participants are required to wear eye protection. 8. ADULT ASSISTANCE – Parents/guardians are encouraged to assist youth with loading and cocking rifles on the firing line. Each participant

must have a coach on the firing line. 9. ENTRY LIMITS – Youth may only participate in one BB Gun class. 10. AWARDS – All participants will receive ribbons. Additionally, the participants with the top three scores in each class will receive special

recognition.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 503 BB GUN – OPEN IRON SITES CLASS 901 Senior Division 13 to 15 years of age CLASS 902 Intermediate Division 10 to 12 years of age CLASS 903 Junior Division 8 to 9 years of age CLASS 904 Senior Plus Division 16 year of age and older

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 503 BB GUN – PEEP SITE CLASS 905 Senior Division 13 to 15 years of age CLASS 906 Intermediate Division 10 to 12 years of age CLASS 907 Junior Division 8 to 9 years of age CLASS 908 Senior Plus Division 16 years of age and older

SHOTGUN EVENT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SHOOTING SPORTS 2. EQUIPMENT – Participants must provide their own gun, ammunition, safety glasses, and earplugs. Participants are required to wear eye

protection. 3. HUNTER EDUCATION – All participants must have a copy of their Firearm Hunter Education certification card on file with the Johnson County

Extension Office prior to participating. 4. DISCIPLINES – Male and female 4-H members will compete together in all disciplines.

• Trapshooting – 50 shots, 16 yards and 25 rocks, handicap 5. AWARDS – All participants will receive ribbons. Additionally, the participants with the top three scores in each class will receive special

recognition.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 504 TRAPSHOOTING CLASS 907 Senior Division 15 to 18 years of age CLASS 908 Intermediate Division 12 to 14 years of age

ENTOMOLOGY GENERAL RULES – ENTOMOLOGY 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTOMOLOGY DISPLAY GENERAL RULES –

45

• Specimens to be mounted properly and labeled with the date and location of collection, name of collector, and order name. • Follow mounting and labeling instructions in the Nebraska 4-H Entomology Manual • Purchased insects and other insects not collected by the participant can be included but must have accurate labels and will not be counted in

meeting minimum requirements for the exhibit. • Boxes to be not more than 12" high X 18" wide X 3" deep.

3. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Entomology division. 4. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 800 ENTOMOLOGY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Entomology Display – First Year Project - Collection to consist of 25 or more different kinds (species) of insects representing at

least 6 orders. Limit of one box. CLASS 2 Entomology Display – Second Year Project - Collection to consist of 50 or more different kinds (species) of insects representing

at least 8 orders. Replace damaged or poorly mounted specimens. About 25 species should be from after July 1 of previous year. Limit of 2 boxes.

CLASS 3 Entomology Display – Third Year or More Project - Collection to consist of 75 or more different kinds (species) of insects representing at least 10 orders. Replace damaged or poorly mounted specimens. About 25 species should be from after July 1 of previous year. Limit of 3 boxes

CLASS 4 Special Interest Display - Educational display developed according to personal interests and/or advanced identification capability. This is also an opportunity to highlight favorite insects in a creative arrangement. Insects should conform to the same pinning and mounting standards of Classes 1-3 and be protected in an insect box. Each specialty display should include names of the insects, interesting information about them, and why the display was made. Advanced identification collections should have insects grouped with labels that correspond with identification level (e.g. family, genus, species). A specialty collection may consist of insects by taxonomic group (e.g. butterflies, grasshoppers, dragonflies, scarab beetles) or by host subject or habitat (e.g. insect pests of corn, aquatic insects, insect mimicry, insect galls, insects from goldenrod, insect pollinators, etc.

CLASS 5 Insect Habitats – Habitats consist of any hand-crafted objects, made of natural or artificial material which are placed outdoors and which promote or conserve insects in the environment. Insects may include bee pollinators, butterflies, beneficial insects, etc. A one-page report describing activities must accompany the exhibit.

CLASS 6 Macrophotography – Subjects should be insects, spiders, or other arthropods, or any nests, webs, or constructions they make. All exhibit prints should be 8 ½” x 11” and mounted on rigid, black 11” x 14” poster or black mat board. Either orientation is acceptable. No frames or mat board framing is allowed. A short caption of a few sentences should explain the subject, printed on white paper, and glued below the print.

CLASS 7 Insect Poster/Display Exhibits – Exhibits can be posters or three-dimensional displays, and artistic creativity is encouraged. Posters should be no larger than 22” x 28”. They should be instructional and can be attractive and have pictures, drawings, charts, or graphs. Posters and displays may show any aspect of insect life, habitat, or related conservation or management. Examples include: life history and other facts about an insect; insect anatomy; how to manage insects in a farm, home, lawn, or garden setting; experiences rearing one kind of insect; survey of an important insect; insect behavior (e.g. nesting, finding food, mobility, defenses, etc.); habitats (e.g. forests, grasslands, wetlands, rivers, or lakes) and what insects are found there, etc. Three-dimensional displays, such as dioramas, sculptures, models or decorative boxes should have a page of explanatory information accompanying them and fit within a 22” x28” area.

CLASS 8 Reports or Journals – Reports and journals should be in a three-ring binder. A report may be informational; that is, an original article about a favorite insect, a history or insect outbreaks, diseases caused by insects, insects as food, etc. Or, it may be a research report about an investigation or experiment done in a scientific manner. It then should have a basic introduction of the insect studied, methods used, observations, and results of the project. Tables, graphs, and images are helpful to include. A journal is an observational study over a period of time with personal impressions. It may cover watching changes of kinds of butterflies over the summer, rearing a specific insect from egg to adult, managing a bee hive, observations of insects in a specific habitat, or accounts of insect behavior in a forest or flower garden, etc.

CLASS 901 Other Exhibit - A different exhibit made demonstrating the knowledge gained in the entomology project.

FORESTRY GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY 1. GENERAL RULES - – See GENERAL RULES 2. OFFICIAL REFERENCE – The official reference for all forestry projects is The Tree Identification Manual (4-H 332). Other helpful forestry

references include Trees of Nebraska (EC 92-1774-X), Leafing Out (4-H431) and Plant a Tree (EC 17-11-80). Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

3. DISPLAY GUIDELINES – • Display "boards" must be made from wood or wood composite, e.g. plywood, fiberboard, or masonite, 1/4" to 1/2” thick and no larger than 24"

x 24". Display boards may be coated, e.g., painted or varnished, on both sides to prevent warping. • Display "posters" must be made from a material, e.g. foam board or poster board, that will stand upright without buckling, and be no larger

than 24" x 24". • Display "books" must measure no more than 16" x 16". • At least 5 of the 10 samples in Class 2, 3, 4, and 5 must be from the list of 60 species described in 4-H 332. • If more than 10 samples are included in a display, only the first 10 samples of the current year will be judged. • All samples must be from trees, NO shrubs. • The 10 samples to be judged must be from 10 different tree species. For example, Emerald Queen Maple and Crimson King Maple are both

varieties of the same species (Norway Maple), and thus have the same genus and species name. • Remember that other general labeling standards apply. For example, scientific names are always italicized or underlined. Also, the first letter

of a Genus name is always capitalized. The first letter of a species name is always lower case. • When required, always indicate complete scientific names (Genus and species) and common names, (e.g. Norway maple) even when “variety

names” are included. For example, the scientific name of Emerald Queen Maple is Acer platanoides and the common name is Norway maple. “Emerald Queen” may be included as the variety name, but variety names are not required.

4. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Forestry division.

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 320 FORESTRY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

46

CLASS 1 Design-Your-Own-Exhibit - Prepare an educational exhibit about some aspect of trees, forests, or forestry that is of special interest to you. Possible topics include paper recycling, forest fire, forest products, forest wildlife, or forest pests. The only requirement is that the display must be no larger than 24” x 24” x 24”. You can use photographs, drawings, samples, charts, posters, etc. Include enough information to adequately explain the topic. Your display should be substantially different from other display classes. Be as creative as you like. See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines.

CLASS 2 Leaf Display - The leaf display must include samples of “complete leaves” from at least 10 different tree species. The display must include at least two samples each of simple leaves, compound leaves, and conifer leaves. Leaves should be pressed, dried, and mounted. • Collection: Whenever possible, collect leaves from mature trees. The leaf samples should also be mature, representative of

the average leaves on the tree, and in good condition. Keep in mind that shaded leaves often are much larger than normal. Carefully remove leaves from the twig with the entire petiole or rachis (if compound) intact. Collect leaves any time after they have reached full size, usually beginning in early summer. During collection, fresh leaf samples can be temporarily stored within the pages of an old magazine, but they should be properly pressed and dried for display. Be sure to record pertinent information during collection.

• Mounting: Leaves may be displayed in a notebook or on a display board. Any method may be used to mount leaves, e.g. wire, glue, tape, staples, plastic bags, but be sure all their features can be clearly identified.

• Labeling: Refer to 4-H 332 for labeling specifications. The label for each sample must include: - Common name

- Scientific name - Leaf type - Leaf arrangement (for broadleaf trees)

- Leaf composition (for broadleaf trees) - Exhibitor’s name - Collection Date - Collection location (be specific, county, etc.)

• Supplemental information, e.g. general uses, common products, fall color, etc., may be included with the display to enhance its educational value.

• See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines CLASS 3 Twig Display - The twig display must include twig samples from at least 10 different tree species. The display must include at least

two samples each of opposite and alternate leaf arrangements from broadleaf trees. • Collection: Twig samples should be collected during the dormant season (November – April) when the buds are mature. Twig

samples must be at least 6” long including the terminal end, contain buds, be in good condition, and not include any leaves or petioles. Any side branches should be trimmed to less than 1”.

• Mounting: Twigs must be mounted on a display board. Any method, e.g. wire, glue, tape, staples, plastic bags, may be used to mount twigs, but be sure all their features can be clearly identified. Be sure to cut the non-terminal end at a slant so the pith can be seen.

• Labeling The label for each sample must include: - Common name

- Scientific name - Leaf arrangement (for broadleaf trees)

- Exhibitor’s name - Collection date - Collection Location (be specific, county, etc.)

• Supplemental information, e.g. general uses, tree characteristics, etc., may be included with the display to enhance its educational value.

• See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines. CLASS 4 Seed Display - The seed display must include seed samples from at least 10 different tree species.

• Collection: Tree seeds should be collected at the time of year when they are mature, which varies widely depending upon tree species. For example, Silver maple seeds mature in May while red oak acorns do not mature until September. Collect seeds that are free of insect or disease symptoms. Remember to display the seeds, and not the fruit. For example, remove and display the seed from a honey locust pod, not just the pod itself. It is acceptable to display the fruit with the seed, but clearly label each.

• Mounting: Seeds may be displayed in a variety of ways, but they must be securely mounted and easily viewed. For example, seeds might be mounted on a display board or displayed in jars in a rack. Be as creative as you like.

• Labeling: The label for each sample must include: - Common name

- Scientific name - Type of fruit, if know (e.g. samara, pod, etc.)

- Exhibitor’s name - Collection date - Collection location (be specific, county, etc.)

• Supplemental information, e.g. maturity date, average number of seed in the fruit, etc., may be included with the display to enhance its educational value.

• See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines. CLASS 5 Wood Identification Display - The wood display must include wood samples from at least 10 different tree species.

• Preparation: Samples may be of any shape (e.g. sections of a board, wood cylinders turned on a lathe, horizontal or vertical cross sections of a small log with bark attached, etc.) Each sample can be no larger that 4” x 4” x 4”. Cut surfaces should be sanded to show the grain. Treating samples with a clear finish (no stain) is optional.

• Mounting: Samples may be displayed in a variety of ways, but they must be securely mounted and easily viewed. For example, wood samples may be mounted on a display board or displayed in a box or rack. Be as creative as you like.

• Labeling: The label for each sample must include: - Common name

- Scientific name - Wood type (softwood or hardwood)

- Exhibitor’s name - Collection date - Collection location (be specific, county, etc.)

• Supplemental information, e.g. common products, density, etc., may be included with the display to enhance its educational value.

• See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines CLASS 6 Cross Section of a Tree - Display a disc cut from a tree species listed in 4H 332.The disc must measure 6” to 12” in diameter and 1”

to 3” thick. The bark should be firmly attached, which may be difficult if the tree was dead when the disc was cut. Sand at least one side of the disc so the grain can be easily seen. The disc may be treated with a clear finish, but treat both sides to minimize warping. Some cracking or checking can be expected and is allowed. • Labeling: The following parts must be clearly and precisely identified on the disc with pins, paper tags, etc.

Pith, Heartwood, Sapwood, One growth ring, Cambium, and Bark A separate label attached to the back of the disc must include: - Common name

47

- Scientific name - Tree classification (softwood or hardwood) - Age (of the cross section) - Exhibitor’s name - Collection location (be specific, including county and other relevant information)

• See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines CLASS 7 Parts of a Tree (This Project is ONLY for ages 8 – 11 Years Old)

• Prepare a poster, no larger than 24” x 24” that clearly identifies the main external parts of any tree: Trunk, Crown, Roots, Leaves, Flowers, Fruit, Buds, and Bark Identifying other internal parts, e.g. phloem, xylem, cambium, annual ring, pith, etc., is optional.

• Attach a separate label on the back of the poster that includes the exhibitor’s name and age. • See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines

CLASS 8 Living Tree Display - Display a living tree seedling grown by the exhibitor from seed. The seed must be from a species listed in 4H 332.The seedling must be 60 days to 1 year old (on judging day). The display container must contain at least 8 inches of soil (potting mix or suitable natural soil), have drainage holes, and a drain pan to catch drainage water. • Labeling: A waterproof label must be attached and include:

- Common name - Scientific name - Seed treatments (if any)

- Planting date - Emergence date - Exhibitor’s name

• Supplemental information about the tree, e.g. where the seed was collected, growth measurements, uses for that species, etc., may be included in an attached notebook, poster, etc.

• Supporting information will be an important factor in judging. • See GENERAL RULES – FORESTRY for further guidelines

HEALTHY LIFESTYLES EDUCATION (FAVORITE FOOD REVUE, FOOD EXHIBITS, SAFETY & PHYSICAL FITNESS)

FAVORITE FOOD REVUE GENERAL RULES – FAVORITE FOOD REVUE 1. ENTRY LIMITS - Participants are allowed one entry. 2. ELIGIBILITY - The Favorite Food Revue is open to any currently enrolled 4-H member. Participants do not have to be currently enrolled in a

foods project. 3. PRE-ENTRY - Participants must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by

closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. 4. PURPOSE - The Favorite Food Revue combines food preparation, menu planning, and table setting skills. 5. REQUIREMENTS

• Participants should plan a menu suitable for the chosen occasion or theme. • Participants should prepare one menu item that is comparable in skill difficulty to the age and experience of the exhibitor. Foods prepared

should be different those prepared in previous years. The recipe for the prepared food does not have to come from a 4—H manual. • Participants should bring the following items the day of the contest: Table service, Centerpiece, Menu Card, Recipe Card, and Card Table

6. JUDGING - The Food Revue will be judged by the interview method. 4-H members will visit individually with the judge at their scheduled time. 4-H members should be knowledgeable about their food product; its preparation, nutritional value, cost, etc.; as well as their menu, table service, and planned occasion for serving.

7. DRESS CODE - Participants should dress appropriately for the contest (official 4-H attire is not required). 8. AWARDS - Special awards will be given to the top three individuals in the Junior (ages 8 to 10), Intermediate (ages 11 to 13), and Senior (ages

14 and over) Divisions. Additionally, the judge will select a top exhibit in the following categories: casual, formal, picnic, and holiday/special occasion.

9. STATE FAIR – The top four individuals receiving a purple placing in the Intermediate and Senior Divisions of the Johnson County Favorite Food Revue are eligible to advance to the Nebraska State Fair 4-H Culinary Challenge Contest (see Nebraska State Fair 4-H Fair Book for further rules). For the state contest each county is eligible to submit four two-person teams (two Intermediate Division team and two Senior Division team). Only two-person teams are allowed to compete at the state contest so teams will be created at the county level based on the criteria stated above.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 200 FAVORITE FOOD REVUE PREMIUM Purple $4.00 Blue $3.00 Red $2.00 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Junior Division 8 to 10 years of age CLASS 902 Intermediate Division 11 to 13 years of age CLASS 903 Senior Division 14 years of age and older

FOODS GENERAL RULES – FOOD EXHIBITS (Food & Nutrition, Food Preservation, and Creative Foods Artistry) 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – In the Food & Nutrition and Creative Food Artistry projects 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE LEVEL of competition

(Beginning, Intermediate, or Advanced). 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class in ALL projects. 3. FOODS & NUTRITION LEVELS – EXHIBITORS ARE ALLOWED ENTRIES IN ONLY ONE LEVEL OF COMPETITION. See below for the list of

projects that fall within each level. • Beginning Food & Nutrition Projects: Six Easy Bites • Intermediate Food & Nutrition Projects: Fast Foods and Tasty Tidbits • Advanced Food & Nutrition Projects: You’re the Chef and Foodworks

4. LABELING & PACKAGING – • Each exhibit must include the recipe. 4-H exhibits not having the recipe will be lowered one ribbon. • Recipe can be handwritten, typed or photocopied. • Exhibits should be placed on the appropriate size paper plate and placed in a self-sealing bag. • Attach entry tag and recipe at the corner of the bag outside.

48

• All additional information (recipes, special items, etc.) must be labeled with the exhibitor’s name and county. 5. CRITERIA FOR JUDGING –

• Exhibits will be judged according to score sheets available in the Extension Office • Carefully follow entry instructions and include all required materials. Incomplete exhibits will be lowered one ribbon placing. • Commercially prepared mixes are allowed in the Tasty Tidbits – Creative Mixes class (CLASS 2) ONLY! • Prepared baking mixes, biscuit mixes, or other pre-made mixes entered in other categories will be lowered one ribbon placing.

6. FOOD SAFETY STANDARDS – • Items that require refrigeration will not be accepted, judged, or displayed. • Food products must be unquestionably safe to eat when they are entered, whether tasted or not. • Egg glazes on yeast products before baking are allowed. • Glazes, frostings, and other sugar-based toppings are also considered safe due to the high sugar content. • Eggs incorporated into baked goods or crusts and cheese mixed into bread dough are considered safe. • Uncooked fruit is not allowed in any exhibit due to spoilage (i.e. fresh fruit tart). All fruit must be cooked. • Cream cheese fillings and/or frostings are not allowed. Meat, dried meat, meat substitute pieces (bacon bits, pepperoni, etc.) or melted cheese

toppings are not allowed in food exhibits. They may result in an unsafe food product by the time the item is judged due to unpredictable heat and/or weather conditions and will be disqualified.

7. PROHIBITED ITEMS – Ingredients that the 4-H member cannot legally purchase, such as: beer, whiskey, rum, etc. may not be used in any recipe or food exhibits. Exhibits that include these items will be disqualified. This includes menu and recipe file exhibits.

8. TOP EXHIBITS & SPECIAL AWARDS – • A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the beginning food & nutrition level, intermediate food & nutrition

level, advanced food & nutrition level, food preservation, and cake decorating. • An overall top decorated cake and top decorated cupcake, selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons, will be eligible for special

awards sponsored by Wilton Enterprises. 9. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

GENERAL FOOD & NUTRITION PROJECTS (Open to all levels) DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 350 GENERAL PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 FOOD SCIENCE Explorations - Open to any 4-H’er enrolled in a Foods and Nutrition project. Show the connection between food and

science as it relates to food preparation, food safety, or food production. Exhibit may be a poster or foam core board (not to exceed 22” by 30”), computer-based presentation printed off with notes pages, if needed, and displayed in binder, an exhibit display, a written report in portfolio or notebook. Consider neatness and creativity.

CLASS 2 Foods and Nutrition Poster, Scrapbook, or Photo Display - Open to any 4-H’er enrolled in a Foods and Nutrition project, involving a nutrition or food preparation or career concept/lesson. This might contain pictures, captions, and/or reports to highlight the concept. Exhibit may be a poster or foam core board (not to exceed 22” by 30”), computer-based presentation printed off with notes pages, if needed, and displayed in binder, an exhibit display, a written report in portfolio or notebook. Consider neatness and creativity.

CLASS 3 Physical Activity and Health Poster, Scrapbook, or Photo Display - Open to any 4-H’er enrolled in a Foods and Nutrition project, involving a physical activity or career concept/ lesson. This might contain pictures, captions, and/or reports to highlight the concept. Exhibit may be a poster or foam core board (not to exceed 22” by 30”), computer-based presentation printed off with notes pages, if needed, and displayed in binder, an exhibit display, a written report in portfolio or notebook. Consider neatness and creativity.

BEGINNING FOOD & NUTRITION PROJECTS

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 409 SIX EASY BITES PREMIUM Purple $1.75 Blue $1.50 Red $1.25 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Cookies (any recipe) – 4 on a small paper plate CLASS 902 Muffins (any recipe) – 4 on a small paper plate CLASS 903 Drop Cookie (any cookie recipe dropped from a spoon or scoop, or formed into balls that are flattened before baking) – 4 on a small

paper plate CLASS 904 Rolled Cookie (any cookie recipe requiring chilling dough, rolling out, and cutting into shapes before baking) – 4 on a small paper

plate CLASS 905 Refrigerator Cookie (any cookie recipe requiring chilling dough in shaped rolls, then slicing before baking) – 4 on a small paper

plate CLASS 906 Bar Cookie (any cookie recipe made in pan and cut into bars or squares for serving) – 4 on a small paper plate CLASS 907 Filled Cookie (any cookie recipe with filling made from non-perishable ingredients, including jellies, jams, fruits, or candies) – 4 on a

small paper plate CLASS 908 Six Easy Bites Food Flop - Exhibit one food item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or

accidental mistake. On a sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit.

INTERMEDIATE FOOD & NUTRITION PROJECTS DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 402 FAST FOODS! PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Coffee Cake (any recipe or shape) - At least 3/4 of baked product. May be exhibited in disposable pan. Include cost of making recipe

and a menu for a complete meal where this recipe is served. CLASS 2 Cost Comparison Exhibit - Exhibit must include a food product made from scratch and a cost comparison to a similar commercial pre-

made item (example: homemade cinnamon rolls compared to purchased premade cinnamon rolls). Supporting information needs to include: cost of the food item made compared to the commercial product and the recipe for the homemade food item. See pg. 22 – 35 of Fast Foods manual. If food item is not exhibited, the exhibit will be lowered a ribbon placing.

CLASS 3 Fast Food Baked Product - Exhibit must include a food product prepared using new technology or a non-traditional method (i.e. bread machine, cake baked in convection oven, baked item made in microwave, etc.). Entry must include supporting information that discusses the alternative method and how it compares with traditional method. If 4-H member doesn't exhibit a food item in this class, the exhibit will be lowered a ribbon placing

49

CLASS 5 Fast Foods Recipe File - Collection of 10 recipes from any source. Each recipe must accompany a complete menu in which the recipe is used. An additional 10 recipes may be added each year 4-H’er is in project, with year clearly marked on recipes. Display in recipe file or in a clear plastic binder. Be sure to include the number of servings or yield of each recipe.

CLASS 901 Fast Foods! Food Flop - Exhibit one food item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or accidental mistake. On a sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 410 TASTY TIDBITS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Healthy Quick Baked Product - Must be made with less sugar, fat or salt; modified to use a sugar or fat substitute; changed to

include a whole grain; or be altered for specific allergies/food intolerances. Exhibit must include ¾ of baked product or 4 muffins or cookies on a paper plate. May be baked in a disposable pan. Include original recipe and altered recipe. Write what you learned about products made from a modified recipe in supporting information.

CLASS 2 Creative Mixes (any recipe) - Exhibit must include at least 3/4 of baked product or 4 muffins or cookies on a paper plate. May be baked in a disposable pan. Baked item made from a mix (commercial or homemade mixes acceptable). Food product must have been modified to make a new or different baked item. (ex. Poppy seed Quick Bread from a cake mix, cake mix cookies, Streusel Coffee Cake from a cake mix, sweet rolls made from ready-made bread dough, monkey bread from refrigerator biscuit dough, etc.). Write what you learned about making this product using a mix instead of a homemade recipe or recipe from “scratch”; does it make it easier to use a convenience product or a mix?

CLASS 3 Biscuits - Four biscuits on a small paper plate. This may be any type of biscuit – rolled, dropped, or cut. Recipe must be a non-yeast product baked from scratch

CLASS 4 Unique Baked Product (any recipe) - Exhibit must include at least 3/4 of baked product or 4 muffins or cookies on a paper plate. May be baked in a disposable pan. Recipe must contain a surprise ingredient and MUST not use a mix (ex. Cantaloupe Quick Bread, Pork & Bean Bread, etc.). Write what you learned about making this unique item with an unusual ingredient. What was the anticipated outcome? Would you make again?

CLASS 5 Foam Cake - Original recipe (no mixes). Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake. Foam cakes are cakes that have a high ratio of eggs to flour and fall into three categories: angel food cakes or meringues; sponge or jelly roll cakes; and chiffon cakes.

CLASS 901 Angel Food Cake - Any cake recipe using egg whites for leavening, including flavored, marbled, or standard angel food cake. Original recipe (no mixes). Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake.

CLASS 902 Sponge Cake - Any cake recipe using egg whites and egg yolks for leavening. Original recipe (no mixes). Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake.

CLASS 903 Chiffon Cake - Any recipe using vegetable oil and egg yolks beaten into flour and dry ingredients. Original recipe (no mixes). Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake

CLASS 904 Pound Cake - Original recipe (no mixes). Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake. May be exhibited on plate or in disposable pan

CLASS 905 Shortening or Butter Cake - Original recipe (no mixes). May be chocolate, white or yellow. Exhibit must include of at least ¾ of the cake. May be exhibited on plate or in disposable pan

CLASS 906 Healthy Fruit Bars - Original recipe (no mixes). May include: pumpkin, banana, applesauce, carrot or zucchini bars or any other similar recipe. No frosting! Exhibit must include 4 bars on a paper plate

CLASS 907 Tasty Tidbits Food Flop - Exhibit one food item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or accidental mistake. On a sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit.

ADVANCED FOOD AND NUTRITION RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – FOOD EXHIBITS 2. BREAD MACHINES –

• Any bread item prepared or baked using a bread machine should be entered under the Fast Foods – Food Technology Class (Class 3). • All exhibits made in the You’re the Chef and Foodworks project areas must have been prepared without the assistance of a bread machine for

mixing, raising, or baking of the food item.

ADVANCED FOOD & NUTRITION PROJECTS

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 411 YOU’RE THE CHEF PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Quick Bread (any recipe) – Quick bread is any bread that does not require kneading or rising time and does not include yeast. At

least ¾ of a standard loaf displayed on a paper plate. A standard quick bread loaf measures approximately 8 ½” x 4 ½” or 9” x 5”. If mini loaf pans are used for exhibit, two loaves must be presented for judging

CLASS 2 White Bread (any yeast recipe) - At least ¾ of a standard loaf displayed on a paper plate CLASS 3 Whole Wheat or Mixed Grain Bread (any recipe)- At least ¾ of a standard loaf displayed on a paper plate CLASS 4 Specialty Rolls (any recipe) - 4 rolls on a paper plate. May be sweet rolls, English muffins, Kolaches, bagels, or any other sweet roll

recipe that makes individual portions. CLASS 5 Dinner Rolls (any yeast recipe) - 4 rolls on a paper plate. May be clover leaf, crescent, know, bun, bread sticks, or any other type of

dinner roll. CLASS 901 Extra Whole Wheat Bread Product (any recipe) - Follow the same criteria as Class 3. CLASS 902 Extra Specialty Roll (any recipe) - Follow the same criteria as Class 4. CLASS 903 Extra Dinner Roll (any recipe) - Follow the same criteria as Class 5. CLASS 904 You’re the Chef Food Flop - Exhibit one food item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or

accidental mistake. On a sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 413 FOODWORKS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Double Crust Fruit Pie - Made with homemade fruit filling. NO egg pastries or cream fillings. No canned fillings. May be a double

crust, crumb, or lattice topping. Enter in an 8” or 9” disposable pie pan. CLASS 2 Family Food Traditions (any recipe) - At least ¾ of baked product or 4 muffins or cookies on a paper plate or can be baked in a

disposable pan. Any baked item associated with family tradition and heritage. Entry must include: 1. Recipe, 2. Tradition or heritage associated with preparing or serving the food, 3. Where or who the traditional recipe came from.

50

CLASS 3 Cultural Food Exhibit (any recipe) - At least ¾ of baked product or 4 cookies or muffins exhibited on a paper plate or baked in a disposable pan. The name of the country, culture, or region should be included as part of the supporting information with the recipe as well as some background information about the country or culture the food item is representing.

CLASS 5 Specialty Bread (any recipe made with yeast) - Tea rings, braids, or other full-sized specialty bread products. Must exhibit at least ¾ of a full sized baked product. May be baked in a disposable pan.

CLASS 6 Specialty Pastry (any recipe) - Pie tarts, puff pastry, phyllo dough, scones, biscotti, choux, croissants, Danish, strudels. Phyllo dough may be pre-made or from scratch. Pastries made with cream or egg-based fillings will be disqualified. Four on a paper plate or at least ¾ of baked product.

CLASS 901 Foodworks Food Flop - Exhibit one food item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or accidental mistake. On a sheet of 8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit.

CLASS 902 Cooking Up a Career - Find someone you know who works in a catering business, local restaurant, health care food service, food scientist, works as a Registered Dietitian, or other food or nutrition related industry. Answer the following questions: 1. What do they do? 2. How much education do they need? 3. Why did they choose this profession? 4. What is the most enjoyable thing about their chosen profession? Maximum of two one-sided pages. Consider creativity and neatness. Mount on 9” x 12” colored paper or poster board (may be laminated to preserve exhibit) or display in a clear plastic binder. Include a picture of the person interviewed

FOOD PRESERVATION RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – FOOD EXHIBITS 2. CURRENT PROJECT – All canning must be the result of this year’s 4-H project since September 1 of the previous calendar year. 3. PROCESSING METHODS –

• Current USDA processing methods and altitude adjustments must be followed for all food preservation. • Jam, preserves and marmalades, fruit, tomatoes, and pickled products MUST be processed in a boiling water bath. • Tomatoes may be processed in a pressure canner. • All non-acid vegetables and meats must be processed in a pressure canner. • Spoiled or open container disqualifies entry.

4. UNIFORMITY – • Jars and type of lid should be the same size, all small or large, not necessarily the same brand. • Half pint jars may be used for jellies and preserves. • The jars are not to be decorated by the exhibitor in any way. • Canning jars must be used – others will be disqualified. • No ¼ pint jars allowed. • Leave jar rings on for fair display, it helps protect the seal. • NO zinc lids. • Improperly canned or potentially hazardous food items will be disqualified.

5. RECIPE/LABELING – All food preservation entries must include recipe and source of recipe. Commercially prepared mixes are not allowed. All canned food must include the following information on the label of the item (write plainly on a label and paste or tape securely on the bottom of the jar, specialized sticky labels not required): • Type of food • Method of preservation (pressure canner or water bath canner) • Type of pack (raw pack or hot pack) • Altitude (and altitude adjustment if needed) • Processing time • Number of pounds of pressure (if pressure canner used) • Date processed • Source of recipe and/or method of preservation (If a publication, include name and date) • RECIPE CAN COME FROM ANY SOURCE BUT CURRENT USDA GUIDELINES FOR FOOD PRESERVATION METHODS MUST BE

USED. See http://food.unl.edu/food-safety-preservation for current USDA guidelines. All dried foods must include the following information on the label of the item (write plainly on label and paste or tape securely to back of a self-sealing bag. Multiple dried food exhibits should be secured by a rubber band or “twisty” to keep exhibit containing the three self-sealing bags together.): • Recipe and recipe source • Method of pretreatment • Drying method and drying time

6. CRITERIA FOR JUDGING – Incomplete exhibits will be lowered one ribbon. Canned food items not processed according to altitude in the county will be lowered one ribbon placing.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISON 407 FOOD PRESERVATION PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Dried Fruit - Exhibit 3 different examples of dried fruit. Place each dried fruit (6 – 10 pieces of fruit, minimum ¼ cup) in a separate

self-sealing bag. Use a rubber band or twist tie to keep exhibit together. CLASS 2 Dried Leather - Exhibit 3 different examples of fruit leathers. Place a 3” – 4” sample of each leather in a separate self-sealing bag.

Use a rubber band or twist tie to keep exhibit together. CLASS 10 Dried Vegetables - Exhibit 3 different examples of dried vegetables. Place each dried vegetable (minimum ¼ cup) in a separate

self-sealing bag. Use a rubber band or twist tie to keep exhibit together. CLASS 11 Dried Herbs - Exhibit 3 different examples of dried herbs. Place each dried herb (¼ cup of each) in a separate self-sealing bag. Use

a rubber band or twist tie to keep exhibit together. CLASS 12 1 Jar Fruit Exhibit - One jar of canned fruit (tomatoes may be included). CLASS 13 3 Jar Fruit Exhibit - Three jars of different canned fruits (tomatoes may be included). May be three different techniques for the

same type of product (i.e. applesauce, canned apples, apple pie filling, etc.). CLASS 14 1 Jar Tomato Exhibit - One jar of tomato product. CLASS 15 3 Jar Tomato Exhibit - Three jars of different canned tomato products (i.e. salsa, sauces without meats, juice, stewed, etc.). CLASS 20 1 Jar Vegetable or Meat Exhibit - One jar of canned vegetable or meat. Include only vegetables canned in a pressure canner. CLASS 21 3 Jar Vegetable - Three jars of different kinds of canned vegetables. Include only vegetables canned in a pressure canner.

51

CLASS 22 Quick Dinner - Exhibit a minimum of three jars and a maximum of five jars (all the same size) plus menu. Meal should include three canned foods that can be prepared within one hour. List complete menu on a 3” x 5” card and attach to one of the jars.

CLASS 30 1 Jar Pickled Exhibit - One jar of a pickled and/or fermented product. Must be processed in a boiling water bath. Open kettle canning in not acceptable.

CLASS 31 3 Jar Pickled Exhibit - Three jars of different kinds of pickled and/or fermented product. Must be processed in a boiling water bath. Open kettle canning in not acceptable.

CLASS 40 1 Jar Jelled Exhibit - One jar of a jam, jelly, or marmalade. CLASS 41 3 Jar Jelled Exhibit - Three different kinds of jelled products. Entry may be made up of either pints of half pints (but all jars need to

be the same size). Entry must be processed in a boiling water bath according to current USDA recommendations. CLASS 901 Other Food Preservation Exhibit – May be dried or canned CLASS 902 Other Food Preservation Exhibit – May be dried or canned CLASS 903 Food Gift - Prepare and package a food gift (for human consumption) creatively. The food item must be made by the 4-H member.

Examples: Cookies in a decorative tin, canned goods in a jar with counted cross stitch lid, etc.

CREATIVE FOODS ARTISTRY RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – FOOD EXHIBITS 2. ELIGIBILITY – Any 4-H member enrolled in a foods project may exhibit in this area 3. CAKE TYPES – Cakes may be flat, cut up, or layer types. Decorated cakes and decorated gingerbread houses are considered as two different

types of entries. 4. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – Supporting information should include years in project, size of tips used on item, why the design was chosen, and

how this cake or decorated item could be used for a special event or occasion. 5. CRITERIA FOR JUDGING – The item is not tasted; judging is based on skill in decorating the item and the creativity used for the design. 6. DECORATING GUIDELINES – All decorations must be constructed by the exhibitor (purchased pre-made icing decorations are not allowed). All

decorations must be edible (with the exclusion of plastic/wooden rods and pins used for support).

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 414 CAKE DECORATING PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

BEGINNING CAKE DECORATING (1 - 2 years in project) CLASS 901 Graham Cracker Gingerbread House - First year exhibitors ONLY. Must be made of graham crackers with edible items. Base shall

not exceed 12” CLASS 902 Decorated Gingerbread House - Must be made of gingerbread with edible items and parts. Base shall not exceed 12” CLASS 903 Decorated Cake (without the use of tips) - Show creativity by using cookies, candies, chocolate chips, etc. to decorate cake for

specific party or theme. CLASS 904 Decorate Cake (with the use of tips) - Cake decorated with two different style decorating tips, any size. CLASS 905 Decorated Cake (with the use of fondant) – Cake decorated primarily with the use of fondant. CLASS 906 Decorated Cookies - Plate of 4 cookies. Cookies may be homemade or purchased by 4-H member CLASS 907 Decorated Cupcakes - Plate of 4 cupcakes. Cupcakes may be homemade or purchased by 4-H member CLASS 908 Decorated Cupcakes (with the use of fondant) – Plate of 4 cupcakes decorated primarily with the use of fondant. Cupcakes may be

homemade or purchased by the 4-H member.

ADVANCED CAKE DECORATING (3 or more years in project) CLASS 909 Decorated Gingerbread House - Must be made of gingerbread with edible items and parts. Base shall not exceed 12” CLASS 910 Decorated Cake (without the use of tips) - Show creativity by using cookies, candies, chocolate chips, etc. to decorate cake for

specific party or theme. CLASS 911 Decorate Cake (with the use of tips) - Cake decorated with two different style decorating tips, any size. CLASS 912 Decorated Cake (with the use of fondant) – Cake decorated primarily with the use of fondant. CLASS 913 Decorated Cookies - Plate of 4 cookies. Cookies may be homemade or purchased by 4-H member. CLASS 914 Decorated Cupcakes - Plate of 4 cupcakes. Cupcakes may be homemade or purchased by 4-H member. CLASS 915 Decorated Cupcakes (with the use of fondant) – Plate of 4 cupcakes decorated primarily with the use of fondant. Cupcakes may be

homemade or purchased by the 4-H member. CANDY RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – FOOD EXHIBITS 2. ELIGIBILITY – Any 4-H member enrolled in a foods project may exhibit in this area 3. DISPLAY – 4 pieces on a paper plate in a plastic bag. 4. MIXES – No commercial mixes allowed.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 414 CANDY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

CLASS 920 Fudge, any kind (made from scratch) CLASS 930 Brittle, any nut (ex. peanut, almond, etc.) CLASS 940 Miscellaneous Candy CLASS 950 Miscellaneous Candy

SAFETY & PHYSICAL FITNESS GENERAL RULES – SAFETY & PHYSICAL FITNESS 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class in ALL projects. 3. CRITERIA FOR JUDGING –

• Exhibits will be judged according to score sheets available in the Extension Office. • Carefully follow entry instructions and include all required materials. Incomplete exhibits will be lowered one ribbon placing.

4. TOP EXHIBITS - A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Safety Area (Safety and Fire Safety projects) and Physical Fitness Area (Bicycling, Lifetime Sports, and YOUth in Motion projects)

5. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 440 SAFETY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 First Aid Kit – A first aid kit is a good way to organize supplies in an emergency. The kit should be assembled in a container

appropriate for the kit’s intended use. A description of where the kit will be stored and examples of specific emergencies for that

52

situation should be included in the exhibit. The kit should include a written inventory and purpose statement for included items. Items should cover the following areas: airway and breathing, bleeding control, burn treatment, infectious disease protection, fracture care, and misc. supplies. Use the Citizen Safety manual (4-H 425, pg. 6-7) as a reference. Any kit containing any of the following will be automatically disqualified: • Prescription medications (if the purpose of the kit is to provide medication for someone with special need, explain in written

description and inventory, but remove the medication) • Articles or items with expiration dates on or before the judging date. (This includes sterile items, non-prescription medications,

ointments, salves, etc. Articles dated month and year only are considered expired on the last day of that month.) • Any controlled substance

CLASS 2 Disaster Kit (Emergency Preparedness) – Disaster kits must contain the materials to prepare a person or family for emergency conditions caused by a natural or man-made incident. Selection of materials is left to the exhibitor. Family or group kits must have enough material or items for each person. A description of the kit's purpose and a list of individual contents is required. Youth are encouraged to test their kit by challenging their family to try to survive using only the included materials for the designated time. If tested, share that experience in kit documentation. Please include an explanation of drinking water needs for your disaster kit. Do not bring actual water to the fair in the kit.

CLASS 3 Safety Scrapbook - The scrapbook must contain 15 news articles from both print and internet sources about various incident types. Mount each clipping on a separate page and accompanied by a description of events leading to the incident and any measures that might have prevented it. The Scrapbook should be bound in a standard size hardcover binder or notebook for 8 ½" X 11" size paper. Correct sentence structure, readability and thorough explanations are an important part of judging.

CLASS 4 Safety Experience – The exhibit should share a learning experience the youth had related to safety. Ex: could be participating in a first aid training, a farm safety day camp, babysitting workshop or similar event; scientific experiment related to safety; or the youth’s response to an emergency situation. The exhibit should include a detailed description of the experience, the youth’s role, some evidence of the youth’s leadership in the situation and a summary of the learning that took place. Exhibits may be presented in a poster with supplemental documentation, a notebook including up to ten pages of narrative and pictures, or a multimedia presentation on a CD lasting up to five minutes.

CLASS 5 Careers in Safety – The exhibit should identify a specific career area in the safety field and include education and certification requirements or available positions, salary information, demand for the field, and a summary of the youth’s interest in the field. Examples of careers include: firefighters, paramedics, emergency management personnel, some military assignments, law enforcement officers, emergency room medical personnel, fire investigator, and more. It is recommended youth interview a professional in the field in their research. Additional research sources might include books, articles, career web sites, job-related government web sites or interviews with career placement or guidance counselors. Exhibits may be presented in a poster with supplemental documentation, a notebook including up to ten pages of narrative and pictures, or a multimedia presentation on a CD lasting up to five minutes.

CLASS 901 You be the Teacher Exhibit - Share with others what you learned in the project. Exhibit may be a poster, notebook, or small display of an educational nature. Include 8 ½” X 11” page describing the exhibit and summary of learning.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 450 FIRE SAFETY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Fire Safety Drawing - This is a home floor plan drawn to SCALE showing primary and secondary escape routes and where fire

extinguishers and smoke detectors are located. Draw every room, including all doors and windows. Draw BLACK or BLUE arrows showing primary escape routes from each room. Draw RED arrows showing secondary routes to use if the primary routes are blocked. Primary and secondary escape routes must lead outside to an assembly location. Documentation should include evidence the escape plan has been practiced at least four times. Posters must be constructed of commercial poster board at least 11” x 14” but not larger than 22” x 28”.

CLASS 2 Fire Safety Scrapbook - This scrapbook will contain at least 10 news articles from both print and internet sources about fires. Each clipping will be mounted on a separate page and include probably cause of the fire and measures that could have prevented it. The scrapbook should be bound in a standard hard cover binder or notebook for 8 ½" x 11" paper. Correct sentence structure, readability and thorough explanations are an important part of judging.

CLASS 3 Fire Prevention Poster - This must be constructed of commercial poster board at least 11" x 14" but not larger than 22” x 28”. Posters should be appropriate to display during National Fire Prevention Week or to promote fire safety at specific times of the year (Christmas, Halloween, 4th of July, etc.). Originality clarity and artistic impression will all be judged. Do not include live fireworks, matches or other flammable/explosive/hazardous materials. Any entry containing this material will be disqualified.

CLASS 901 You be the Teacher Exhibit - Share with others what you learned in the project. Exhibit may be a poster, notebook, or small display of an educational nature. Include 8 ½” X 11” page describing the exhibit and summary of learning.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 530 BICYCLING PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Bike Restoration Report - Exhibitors need to restore/overhaul/upgrade a bicycle to include current safety features. A report must

include the following information: Describing costs, repair costs, and what was done. “Before” and “After” photos should be included.

CLASS 902 Bicycle Display - It may include: 1) parts or system of a bicycle, 2) working or broken parts, or 3) a step-by-step procedure of how some repair or service job is performed. A limited number of photographs are acceptable. Actual parts or cut-aways of parts are recommended.

CLASS 903 Bicycle Anatomy - Poster showing the parts of a bicycle. CLASS 904 Comparison Report - A report of price and feature comparisons that you took into account when purchasing a bike of your own. CLASS 905 You be the Teacher Exhibit - Share with others what you learned in the project. Exhibit may be a notebook or small display of an

educational nature. Include 8 ½” X 11” page describing the exhibit and summary of learning.

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 530 LIFETIME SPORTS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 906 Archery - The article may be a diorama, poster, scrapbook, notebook, etc. that expresses something learned or explains some

aspect of the archery project CLASS 907 Golf - The article may be a diorama, poster, scrapbook, notebook, etc. that expresses something learned or explains some aspect

of the golf project CLASS 908 Bowling - The article may be a diorama, poster, scrapbook, notebook, etc. that expresses something learned or explains some

aspect of the bowling project

53

CLASS 909 Tennis - The article may be a diorama, poster, scrapbook, notebook, etc. that expresses something learned or explains some aspect of the tennis project

CLASS 910 Other Lifetime Sport - The article may be a diorama, poster, scrapbook, notebook, etc. that expresses something learned or explains some aspect of a sport not listed above (example: running, etc.).

DEPARTMENT E DIVISION 300 YOUTH IN MOTION PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 YOUth in Motion Poster, Scrapbook, or Photo Display - Exhibit is about the 4-H’ers family or their own involvement in a physical

activity or concept/lesson involving this project. This might contain pictures, captions, and/or reports about the physical activity the individual or family did as a result of taking this project.

CLASS 902 Activity Bag - A duffle bag or backpack that the 4-H’er packs so that they are always prepared to be active and make healthy food choices. May include proper workout attire, a healthy beverage or snack, a notebook or goal sheet, etc. Make sure all items are clean, clearly labeled and an explanation of why it is included in the Activity Bag. DO NOT put valuable items (i.e. electronics) in Activity Bag, instead use a picture of the item or include in the listing of items

CLASS 903 YOUth in Motion Healthy Snack Recipe File - Collection of 10 recipes from any source. Each recipe must accompany a complete snack menu in which the recipe is used, following the idea that a healthy snack includes foods from at least two different food groups. An additional 10 recipes may be added each year 4-H’er is in project, with year clearly marked on recipes. Consider creativity and neatness. Display in recipe file, box, or in a clear plastic binder. Be sure to include the number of servings or yield of each recipe.

CLASS 904 Healthy Lifestyle Interview - Interview someone in your life that you admire that is physically active or has a healthy lifestyle - Why do they enjoy their exercise program or lifestyle choices? - What are their goals? - Why do you admire them?

Maximum of two pages, one sided write up of an interview with someone who has an active exercise program or has a healthy lifestyle. Consider creativity and neatness. Mount on colored paper or poster board, or display in a binder. Include a picture of the person interviewed (may be laminated to preserve exhibit). Overall size of mounted exhibit should be no larger than 9” x 12”.

CLASS 905 Healthy Snack - See ideas for non- perishable snacks on pg. 36 of YOUth in Motion manual, Four cookies, bars, muffins, etc., on a paper plate or at least 1 cup of mix. Examples might include: granola bars, homemade crackers or chips. Supporting information to include recipe, and why this snack might be considered a healthy snack.

LEADERSHIP & CITIZENSHIP

GENERAL RULES – CITIZENSHIP 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. PURPOSE – The purpose of these citizenship exhibits is to foster civic responsibility and action within the diverse areas of citizenship including

community service, service learning, government and policy-making. 3. SUPPORTING MATERIALS - All entries must have a statement explaining the purpose of the exhibit and how the exhibit will be used.

Exhibitors are encouraged to show evidence of their personal field experiences, study or observations that relate to their exhibit. This helps the judges understand what the 4-H member did and learned in the process that led to the exhibit.

4. REFERENCES - All exhibitors should reference material sources or supporting information used in exhibits (i.e., if questions from a game were taken from an outside source, they must be referenced).

5. TOP EXHIBITS – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the citizenship area. 6. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT A DIVISION 120 CITIZENSHIP PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Care Package Display – This exhibit is a display about the PROCESS of creating and giving a

care package, not the actual care package. You may use a poster, Power Point or another multimedia program to tell about the PROCESS of developing and giving a care package to a service organization. You need to answer the following questions in your exhibit: 1.) How did you select the organization? 2.) What items did you include in your care package? 3.) Why did you select those items? 4.) How did it feel to present your care pack to the organization? 5.) What did you learn from this experience? 6.) Other information you feel is important about the care package or organization? Some examples of care packages are: Backpacks for school supplies, litter pan for animal shelter items, suitcase for abuse or homeless shelter, etc.

CLASS 2 Citizenship Game – Could include but is not limited to symbol flash cards, question and answer board or stimulation with props. Clear instructions on how to play the game and what the game hopes to accomplish must be included.

CLASS 3 Patriotic or Cultural Fine Arts – Can be made of any art media, but should tie in the relevance of the artwork to citizenship.

CLASS 4 Public Adventure Scrapbook – Should describe your Public Adventure or Service Learning Activity. Scrapbooks must measure no more than 16" x 16"

CLASS 5 Public Adventure Poster – Should describe your Public Adventure or Service Learning Activity. Display posters must be stiff enough to stand when supported from behind and below. Length and width must be no more that 24" x 28".

CLASS 6 Written or Recorded Stakeholder Interview – Should follow the outline found in the Public Adventures Curriculum. It may be written or recorded.

CLASS 7 Written Citizenship Essay – Designed to promote good citizenship and patriotism. This essay is open to all age groups. All essays should be 300-400 typewritten words.

CLASS 8 Oral Citizenship Essay (9th – 12th graders only) – Addressing the theme “Freedom’s Obligations” should be 3-5 minutes. No background music, singing or other enhancement allowed. All essays should be on a good-quality cassette tape and in a natural style. Voice tone should be normal and conversational. A copy of the written essay should be attached.

CLASS 9 Service Items – Can include but aren’t limited to lap quilt and homemade toys. Only non-perishable items will be accepted. Attached to the exhibit should be an explanation of who the recipient was and how the service project was made and used. The service item could be part of a larger community

54

service effort. CLASS 10 4-H Club Exhibit – Should depict what a 4-H club has done in the area of community service. This

item could include, but is not limited to, a service item, poster, scrapbook, cultural or creative arts item or care package.

CLASS 901 4-H Member Exhibit – Should depict what a 4-H member has done in the area of community service. This item could include, but is not limited to, a service item, poster, scrapbook, cultural or creative arts item or care package.

DEPARTMENT A DIVISION 130 CITIZENSHIP: SEEING I2I PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Cultural Fine Arts - Can be made of any art media but should symbolize what makes them unique. CLASS 2 How are We Different? - Interview should follow the interview guide in the participant manual on page 3

and should reflect on the differences and similarities between you and the person you are interviewing. CLASS 3 Name Art - Should be a creative art exhibit that symbolizes or explains where your name came from and

what it means. Can use any media. CLASS 4 Family History - Depicting your family cultural history or the ethnic make-up of your community noting

who were the first settlers, where did they come from, is there evidence of the background today(local celebrations, family celebrations, museum or educational displays, historical markers, etc.)

CLASS 5 Cultural Food - Exhibit depicting a cultural food that is special to your family. Can be a story or essay. CLASS 6 This is Who I Am Poem CLASS 7 Poster - Poster that depicts what you have learned through the i2i Project. CLASS 8 Biography - About an historical figure that has made a positive impact on our society or who have made a

difference in the lives of others. CLASS 9 Play Script - Written about a different culture. CLASS 901 Other Exhibit – A different finished item utilizing the knowledge gained in this

project.

GENERAL RULES – LEADERSHIP 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. TOP EXHIBITS – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the leadership area. 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 502 LEADERSHIP PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00CLASS 901 Serving as a Junior Leader – Notebook demonstrating service preformed as a Junior Leader over the current year. Should

include photographs and supporting information that answers the following questions: 1.) What service did you provide? 2.) What skills did you learn? 3.) What knowledge were you able to teach to younger 4-H members? 4.) What challenges did you face? 5.) What are your strengths and weakness as a leader?

CLASS 902 Success Builds Success – A written resume or portfolio demonstrating involvement and accomplishment in 4-H, other activities, and academics. Use a format of your choice.

CLASS 903 Other Exhibit – A different finished item utilizing the knowledge gained in this project.

PLANT SCIENCE(HORTICULTURE CONTEST, AGRONOMY (CROPS, WEEDS & RANGE) & HORTICULTURE EXHIBITS)

HORTICULTURE CONTEST GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE CONTEST 1. ELIGIBILITY - All currently enrolled 4-H members are eligible to participate in the horticulture contest regardless of projects carried. 2. AWARDS - All participants will receive ribbons. Additionally, the participants with the top three scores in each division will receive special

recognition. 3. CONTEST PARTS –

IDENTIFICATION – Senior and Intermediate Divisions will be expected to identify 60 specimens. The Junior Division will be expected to identify 30 specimens. Specimens will include: flowers, fruits, woody ornamentals, and vegetables. JUDGING – Four classes of plants will be judged as availability permits. Each class will consist of 4 plates of fruits or vegetables or bulbs OR 4 individual plants or containers OR 4 containers of cut flowers. Plant material within each class will be ranked 1 thru 4 (with one being the best). QUIZ – A multiple choice, true/false test will be given. Questions will be taken from 4-H horticulture project materials and selected UNL Extension publications.

DEPARTMENT F DIVISION 500 HORTICULTURE CONTEST PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Senior Division 14 years of age and older CLASS 902 Intermediate Division 10 to 13 years of age CLASS 903 Junior Division 8 to 9 years of age

AGRONOMY GENERAL RULES – AGRONOMY (CROP PRODUCTION, WEED MANAGEMENT & RANGE MANAGEMENT)

1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. PURPOSE OF EXHIBITS – The purpose of these exhibits is to demonstrate to the public the benefits from the study and application of crop,

range and soil sciences to solving problems in management, conservation, sustainability and environmental protection. 3. TOP EXHIBITS – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the agronomy area (crop production, weed

management, and range management projects). 4. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County. CROP PRODUCTION RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – AGRONOMY 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY – Individuals with field crops and crop production projects may exhibit grain or plants or prepare an educational display

representing their project.

55

3. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – A two-page (maximum) essay must accompany grain and plant exhibits. The essay must include the exhibitors name and address, county, plant hybrid or variety, plant population, whether crop production was irrigated or dryland, and general information including farm cropping history, soil type and weather effects. The essay must also include an economic analysis of the project, covering income and expenses per acre. Other topics to discuss are the selection of variety or hybrid, impacts of tillage and conservation practices, inputs (fuel, fertilizer, irrigation, labor, pesticides, etc.), any observations made during the growing season, and what you learned from your crops project. The essay counts as 50% of the total when judged. Essay must be the original work of the individual exhibitor. Attach the essay to the entry in a clear plastic cover such that it can be read without removing it from the cover. In addition to the essay, grain and plant exhibits will be judged on condition, appearance (i.e. disease and insect damage, grain fill), uniformity (size, shape, color, maturity), and quality of exhibit. Exhibits lacking the required supporting material will be lowered on ribbon place.

4. GRAIN EXHIBITS – Must be one gallon per sample. Fall harvested crops (e.g. corn or soybeans) may be from the previous year’s project. 5. PLANT EXHIBITS –

• Corn: 10 ears or 3 stalks (cut at ground level and bound together) • Grain Sorghum: 4 stalks (cut at ground level and bound together) • Soybeans – 6 stalks (cut at ground level and bound together) • Small grains (oats, barley, wheat, triticale) • 2 sheaves of heads 2 inches in diameter at top tie with stems about 24” long • Other crops (alfalfa, millet, etc.) – Sheaf of stems 3” in diameter at top tied with stems cut at ground level or half size small square bale All plant exhibits, with the exception of ears of corn, must be the result of current year’s project.

6. GUIDELINES FOR ALL DISPLAYS – The purpose of the display is to tell an educational story to those who view the display. The display is a visual representation (pictures, charts, graphs) as a poster on 28” x 28” plywood or poster board. The display should be neatly titled. Make sure to label display with exhibitor’s name, address, and county on the backside. Explain pictures and graphs clearly and concisely. Consider creativity and neatness. Each display must have a one-page essay explaining why the exhibitor chose the area of display and what they learned from their experience. Include any references used. The essay should be in a clear plastic cover with the exhibitor’s name on the outside. Exhibits lacking the required supporting material will be lowered on ribbon place.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 750 CROP PRODUCTION PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Corn (includes yellow, white, pop, waxy, or any other type) CLASS 2 Soybeans CLASS 3 Oats CLASS 4 Wheat CLASS 5 Any other crop (includes grain sorghum, alfalfa, millets, barley, rye, triticale, amaranth, dry beans, sugar beet, mung bean,

canola, forage sorghum, safflower, etc.) CLASS 6 Crop Production Display – The purpose of this class is to allow original and creative exhibits that contain educational information

about crop production aspects, such as crop scouting, alternative crops, bioenergy, etc. CLASS 7 Crop Technology Display – Display information about aspects of technology used in crop production, such as genetic

engineering, crop breeding, GPS, yield mapping, computers, etc. CLASS 8 Crop End Use Display – Display information about the uses for a crop including examples of products. CLASS 9 Water or Soil Display – Display information about water or soils, such as how soils are being used for crop production, range,

conservation, wildlife, or wetland use, or ways to protect or conserve water and soil resources. CLASS 10 Career Interview Display – The purpose of this class is to allow youth to investigate a career in agronomy. Youth should

interview one person that works with crops about such topics as, what parts of their job do they enjoy or dislike, why did they choose that career, what was their education, etc. Include a picture of the person interviewed.

WEED MANAGEMENT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES - See GENERAL RULES – AGRONOMY 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY – Any individual with a range or conservation project may exhibit a weed book. The book cover and at least 15 specimens

must represent this year’s work. 3. REFERENCE MATERIALS – For assistance identifying plants, participants can use the Nebraska Department of Agriculture’s Weeds of Nebraska

and the Great Plains (1994) or Weeds of the Great Plains (2003). 4. JUDGING – Exhibits will be judged based on completeness of plant mount, accuracy of identification, label, neatness, and conformity to exhibit

requirements. 5. BOOK GUIDELINES – Display one plant on the book cover (no label required on cover specimen.) Plants must be mounted on sheets that are 14”

wide x 14” high. Plants should be glued rather than taped and the mounts should be protected with a clear cover. Each completed mount must have the following information typed or printed neatly in the lower righthand corner of the mounting sheet:

Scientific name (in italics or underlined) with authority Common name County of collection Collection date Collector’s name Collection number Other information depending on class selected (i.e. noxious, life form, etc.)

6. DISPLAY GUIDELINES – The purpose of the display is to tell an educational story to those who view the display. The display is a visual representation (pictures, charts, graphs) as a poster on 28” x 28” plywood or poster board. The display should be neatly titled. Make sure to label display with the exhibitor’s name, address, and county on back side. Explain pictures and graphs clearly and concisely. Each display must have a one-page essay in a clear plastic cover explaining why the exhibitor chose the area of display and what they learned from their project. Entries lacking this supporting information will be lowered one ribbon placing. Include references used. The essay should be in a clear plastic cover with the exhibitor’s name outside.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 751 WEED MANAGEMENT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Weed Identification Book - Each book shall contain a minimum of 15 plant mounts and must include at least two of the following

prohibited noxious weeds (Canada thistle, must thistle, plumeless thistle, salt cedar, leafy spurge, purple loosestrife, diffuse knapweed or spotted knapweed, Japanese knotweed, bohemian knotweed, giant knotweed, sericea lespedeza, or phragmites), and at least five weeds that are a problem primarily in lawns.

CLASS 2 Life Span Book – A collection of 7 perennial, 1 biennial, and 7 annual weeds selected from grasses, sedges, or forbs.

56

CLASS 3 Weed Display – The purpose of this class is to allow original and creative exhibits that contain educational information about weeds, such as the effects of weed control, herbicide resistant weeds, uses for weeds, or makes a weed a weed.

RANGE MANAGEMENT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES - See GENERAL RULES – AGRONOMY 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY – Individuals in Range Management Unit I may exhibit a collection of 12 different range plants in Classes 1-5. Individuals in

Range Management Unit II may exhibit in Classes 1-7. 3. REFERENCE MATERIALS – For assistance identifying and categorizing plants, participants can use the Range Judging Handbook for Nebraska

(EC 84-109), Nebraska Range and Pasture Plants (EC 85-170) and Nebraska Range/Pasture Forbs and Shrubs (EC 89-118). 4. JUDGING – Each exhibit must be properly identified with Unit and Class. Exhibits will be judged based on completeness of plant mount, accuracy

of identification, label, neatness and conformation to project requirements. All plant displays and display covers must be the result of current year’s work.

5. BOOK GUIDELINES – Plants must be mounted on sheets that are 14” wide x 14” high. Plants should be glued rather than taped and the mounts should be protected with a clear cover. Each completed mount must have the following information typed or printed neatly in the lower righthand corner of the mounting sheet:

Scientific name (in italics or underlined) with authority Common name County of collection Collection date Collector’s name Collection number Other information depending on class selected (i.e. grazing response, longevity, season of growth, etc.)

DEPARTMENT D DIVISION 330 RANGE MANAGEMENT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Value and Importance for Livestock Forage and Wildlife Habitat and Food – A collection of 12 different plants with 4 classified as

high value, 4 as medium value, and 4 as low value for livestock forage, wildlife habitat, or wildlife food. Plants can consist of any combination of grasses, grass-like plants, forbs, or shrubs. Assemble plant mounts in order of high, medium, and low value and importance. Label each plant mount with its value and importance classifications for each of the three area: Livestock Forage, Wildlife Habitat, and Wildlife Food.

CLASS 2 Life Span Book – A collection of 6 perennial plants and 6 annual plants selected from grasses or forbs. CLASS 3 Growth Season Book – A collection of 6 cool-season grasses and 6 warm-season grasses. CLASS 4 Origin Book – A collection of 6 native range grasses and 6 introduced grasses. Introduced grasses are not from North America and

often used to seed pastures. CLASS 5 Major Types of Range Plants Book – A collection of 3 grasses, 3 forbs, 3 grass-like, and 3 shrubs. CLASS 6 Range Plant Collection Book – A collection of 12 range plant mounts with something in common (i.e. poisonous to cattle, historically

used as food by Native Americans, dye plants, favorite antelope forage, etc.) Include a short paragraph in the front of the book which describes what the plants have in common and why you have chosen to collect them.

CLASS 7 Parts of a Range Plant Poster – Mount a range plant to a poster board. Label all the plant parts. Include the plant label in the lower right corner.

CLASS 8 Range Plant Board – Will include 25 range forage species important to a particular county. The display board should be hinged in the middle. Each completed mount must have the following information typed or printed neatly:

Scientific name (in italics or underlined) with authority Common name County of collection Collection date Collector’s name Personal collection number, indicating the order that plants were collected in your personal collection Other information as needed

CLASS 9 Special Study Exhibit – A display of the results of a clipping study, a degree of use study, or a range site study. The boards in this class should be 30” x 36” or if hinged in the middle, may be 60” x 36”. The display should be adequately labeled.

CLASS 10 Junior Rancher Exhibit – The exhibit should include a ranch map with a record book or an appropriate educational display on some phase of rangeland or livestock.

HORTICULTURE GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. TOP EXHIBTS – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Floriculture; Vegetable, Herbs & Fruits

projects; and Grow a Beautiful Space projects 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

FLORICULTURE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE EXHIBITS 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY - Youth must be enrolled in the World of Flowers and/or Annual Flowers projects to exhibit in classes 1-44 (cut flowers) and

50-53 (notebooks and posters). Youth must be enrolled in the Growing Great Houseplants project to exhibit in classes 60-65 (container grown plants).

3. ENTRY LIMITS - Youth may enter a maximum of 4 entries in classes 1-53. Youth may enter a maximum of 3 entries in classes 60-65. 4. PREPARING ENTRIES - Follow the guidelines in 4-H “Preparing Cut Flowers for Exhibits” 4H227 (revised 7/20/12) (Available at:

https://johnsoncounty4h.org/static-exhibit-resources/) when preparing entries for the fair. 5. CULTIVARS - The cultivar or variety name must be included on all entry cards. Failure to identify the cultivar or variety will drop the entry one

ribbon placing. Keep your seed package or identification label at planting time. Proper identification is the responsibility of the exhibitor not the Extension Staff or Office personnel.

6. ENTRY TAGS - For Floriculture, punch hole in the top center of entry tag and use a rubber band to securely attach entry tag to containers. 7. CLASSIFICATION - Exhibits entered under an incorrect class number or containing an incorrect number of flowers will be dropped one ribbon

placing. A perennial is defined as a plant of which the crown overwinters. An annual is a plant that grows from seed each season, whether self-

57

seeded or planted by the gardener. A biennial is a plant that germinates, grows and overwinters as a crown, blooms the following year and dies. Foliage will be considered when exhibit is judged.

8. CUT FLOWERS - All 3 or 5 stems of cut flowers should be the same cultivar and color, do not mix cultivars and colors. Containers will not be judged; however, they should be glass containers of a neutral color that won’t tip over and of adequate size to display blooms. Containers will not be returned from State Fair.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 770 ANNUALS & BIENNIALS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 *5 stems of a single variety (cultivar) unless noted in parenthesis. CLASS 1 Aster CLASS 13 Hollyhock (3 stems) CLASS 2 Bachelor Buttons CLASS 14 Marigold CLASS 3 Bells of Ireland CLASS 15 Pansy CLASS 4 Browallia CLASS 16 Petunia CLASS 5 Calendula CLASS 17 Salvia CLASS 6 Celosia (crested or plumed – 3 stems) CLASS 18 Snapdragon CLASS 7 Cosmos CLASS 19 Statice CLASS 8 Dahlia CLASS 20 Sunflower (under 3” in diameter – 5 stems; 3” or more CLASS 9 Dianthus in diameter – 3 stems) CLASS 10 Foxglove CLASS 21 Vinca CLASS 11 Gladiolus (3 stems) CLASS 22 Zinnia CLASS 12 Gomphrena CLASS 23 Any other annual or biennial (under 3” in diameter – 5

stems; 3” or more in diameter – 3 stems) (DO NOT duplicate entries in classes 1-22)

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 770 PERENNIALS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 *5 stems of a single variety (cultivar) unless noted in parenthesis. CLASS 30 Achillea/Yarrow CLASS 37 Liatris (3 stems) CLASS 31 Chrysanthemum CLASS 38 Lilies (3 stems, NOT Daylilies) CLASS 32 Coneflower CLASS 39 Platycodon CLASS 33 Coreopsis CLASS 40 Rose (3 stems) CLASS 34 Daisy CLASS 41 Rudbeckia/Black-eyed Susan CLASS 35 Gaillardia CLASS 42 Sedum CLASS 36 Helianthus CLASS 43 Statice CLASS 44 Any other perennial (under 3” in diameter – 5 stems; 3” or

more in diameter – 3 stems) (DO NOT duplicate entries in classes 30-43)

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 770 GARDEN COLLECTION PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 45 4-H Flower Garden Collection of 5 Different Flowers – Display in a box or other holder not more that 18” in any dimension.

(Boxes will not be returned from State Fair.) Each flower in the collection should be exhibited with the number specified for classes 1-44. Do not duplicate entries in classes 1-44 with any in the group collection.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 770 NOTEBOOKS & POSTERS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 50 Flower Notebook - Exhibit a notebook containing pictures of flowers. There must be at least 10 different species of annuals and/or

biennials and 10 different species of perennials. The notebook must be the result of the current year’s work. 4-H’ers may show more than one cultivar of the same species, but they will only count as one species. Pictures from garden catalogs, hand drawn pictures or photographs may be used. Each cultivar must be labeled with the correct common name and scientific name; the height and spread of the plant and the growing conditions (for example: needs full sun and dry sandy soil) the species prefers; bulbs may be included in a separate section and in addition to the above information, bulbs should also be labeled as spring or summer flowering. The 4-H member’s name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the notebook.

CLASS 51 Flower Garden Promotion Poster - Individual poster promoting flower gardening, size 14" x 22" either vertical or horizontal arrangement. Poster may be in any medium: watercolor, ink, crayon, etc. as long as it is not 3-dimensional. Posters using copyrighted material will not be accepted. Entry card must be stapled to the upper righthand corner. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the poster.

CLASS 52 Educational Flower Garden Poster - Prepare a poster no larger than 14" x 22" x 2" (3-dimensional if needed) either vertical or horizontal arrangement illustrating a skill or project you have done or learned about in a 4-H flowers or houseplant project. One might show a special technique used or equipment incorporated in the garden. Refer to 4-H horticulture project manuals but use your own creativity. Entry card must be stapled to the upper righthand corner. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the poster

CLASS 53 Flower Gardening History Interview - Neatly handwritten or typed account of a gardening history interview whose flower garden has inspired you. Maximum of 4 pages of text and 2 pages of pictures (include 1 picture of the person you interviewed) of their flower garden if the individual is still gardening. Protect with a clear report cover or small 3-ring notebook. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the report.

CONTAINER GROWN PLANT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE EXHIBITS 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY - Youth must be enrolled in the Growing Great Houseplants project to exhibit in classes 60-65. 3. JUDGING CRITERIA - The choice of container and soil quality will be considered in judging. Plants should be grown in the display container for

a minimum of six weeks. Entries in Classes 63-65 must have been designed and planted by the 4-H member. 4. IDENTIFICATION - Each plant must be identified by listing the names on the entry tag or on a card attached to the container. 5. SIZE LIMITS - Container grown plants shall be in pots no greater than 12" in diameter and weigh no more than 10 pounds. Dish and desert

gardens may be up to 12" in diameter but not more than 10 pounds. Terrariums may not weigh over 10 pounds. Any container grown plant in Classes 60-65 that exceeds the size limits will be lowered one ribbon placing.

6. OTHER REQUIREMENTS - For classes 60-64, exhibitors must provide a saucer to catch drainage water. The 4-H members name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the bottom or back of the container and saucer.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 770 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS

58

PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 60 Flowering Potted Plants(s) - Must be blooming for exhibition (Non-blooming plants will be disqualified) CLASS 61 Foliage Potted Plant(s) – Must be of all the same variety CLASS 62 Hanging Basket (of flowering and/or foliage plants) CLASS 63 Dish Garden – an open container featuring a variety of plants excluding cacti and succulents CLASS 64 Fairy or Miniature Garden – A miniature “scene” contained in an open container and featuring miniature or small, slow growing

houseplants. The garden needs to have an imaginative theme and miniature accessories (i.e. bench, fence made from tiny twigs, small shell for a bath tub, etc.)

CLASS 65 Desert Garden – An open/shallow container featuring cacti and/or succulents grown as houseplants. CLASS 66 Terrarium – A transparent container, partially or completely enclosed; sealed or unsealed CLASS 901 Other Container Grown Plants CLASS 902 Original Flower Arrangement - An original arrangement made with flowers from your gardening project NO PURCHASED

FLOWERS ACCEPTED. Should not be larger than 12"x 12" CLASS 903 Original Arrangement of Natural Materials - An original arrangement made with a combination of native grasses, flowers, vines

or other natural materials, should not be larger than 18” x 18” CLASS 904 Original Arrangement with a Combination of Materials - An original arrangement made with a combination of materials such

as vegetables, fruits, herbs, and flowers from your gardening project or native materials, etc. NO PURCHASED FLOWERS ACCEPTED, should not be larger than 18” x 18”

VEGETABLES, HERBS & FRUITS GENERAL RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE EXHIBITS 2. ENTRY ELIGIBILITY - Youth must be enrolled in the Everyone a Gardener and/or Gardening Unit 1-4 to exhibit in classes 201-294 and 901-904. 3. ENTRY LIMITS - Youth may enter a maximum of 4 entries in classes 201-294 4. PREPARING ENTRIES - Follow the guidelines in “Selecting and Preparing Vegetables, Herbs and Fruits for Exhibit” 4H226 (revised June 2013)

(Available at: https://johnsoncounty4h.org/static-exhibit-resources/) when preparing entries for the fair. 5. CULTIVARS - The cultivar or variety name must be included on all entry cards. Failure to identify the cultivar or variety will drop the entry one

ribbon placing. Keep your seed package or identification label at planting time. Proper identification is the responsibility of the exhibitor not the Extension Staff or Office personnel.

6. CLASSIFICATION - Exhibits entered under an incorrect class number or containing an incorrect number of flowers will be dropped one ribbon placing.

7. COLLECTION OF FIVE – Vegetables or herbs entered in the collection of 5 cannot be the same cultivar as those entered in the single exhibits.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 773 VEGETABLES PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 Number

to Exhibit Number to

Exhibit CLASS 201 Lima Beans 12 CLASS 229 Pumpkin 2 CLASS 202 Snap Beans 12 CLASS 230 Miniature Pumpkin 5 CLASS 203 Wax Beans 12 CLASS 231 Radish 5 CLASS 204 Beets 5 CLASS 232 Rhubarb 5 CLASS 205 Broccoli 2 CLASS 233 Rutabaga 5 CLASS 206 Brussels Sprouts 12 CLASS 234 Green Summer Squash 2 CLASS 207 Green Cabbage 2 CLASS 235 Yellow Summer Squash 2 CLASS 208 Red Cabbage 2 CLASS 236 White Summer Squash 2 CLASS 209 Carrots 5 CLASS 237 Acorn Squash 2 CLASS 210 Cauliflower 2 CLASS 238 Butternut Squash 2 CLASS 211 Slicing Cucumber 2 CLASS 239 Buttercup Squash 2 CLASS 212 Pickling Cucumber 5 CLASS 240 Other Winter Squash 2 CLASS 213 Eggplant 2 CLASS 241 Sweet Corn (in husks) 5 CLASS 214 Kohlrabi 2 CLASS 242 Swiss Chard 5 CLASS 215 Muskmelon/Cantaloupe 2 CLASS 243 Red Tomatoes (>2” diam.) 5 CLASS 216 Okra 5 CLASS 244 Roma/Sauce Tomatoes 5 CLASS 217 Yellow Onions 5 CLASS 245 Salad Tomatoes 12 CLASS 218 Red Onions 5 (<2” diam.) CLASS 219 White Onions 5 CLASS 246 Yellow Tomatoes 5 CLASS 220 Parsnips 5 (>2” diam.) CLASS 221 Bell Peppers 5 CLASS 247 Turnips 5 CLASS 222 Sweet (Non-Bell) Peppers 5 CLASS 248 Watermelon 2 CLASS 223 Jalapeno Peppers 5 CLASS 249 Edible Dry Beans 1 pint CLASS 224 Hot(Non-Jalapeno) Peppers 5 CLASS 250 Gourds, mixed types 5 CLASS 225 White Potatoes 5 CLASS 251 Gourds, single variety 5 CLASS 226 Red Potatoes 5 CLASS 252 Other Vegetable – Do Not 2, 5 or CLASS 227 Russet Potatoes 5 duplicate entries in classes 12 CLASS 228 Other Potatoes 5 CLASS 255 4-H Vegetable Garden Collection - Five kinds of vegetables displayed in a box not more than 24" in any dimension (State Fair

- Boxes will not be returned). Showmanship will be considered in judging, but plastic grass, cotton, figurines, etc. should not be used in exhibit boxes. Each vegetable in the collection should be exhibited with the number specified for individual class (201-252). Do not duplicate entries in classes 201-252 with any in the group collection.

CLASS 256 4-H Cultivar Vegetable Collection - Vegetables entered in the collection are 5 cultivars from a single exhibit; for example, 5 cultivars of all types of peppers, squash, onions, tomatoes, etc. Display in a box not more that 24" in any dimension (State Fair - Boxes will not be returned). Showmanship will be considered in judging; but plastic grass, cotton, figurines, etc. should not be used in exhibit boxes. Each vegetable in the collection should be exhibited with the number specified for individual class (201-252).

59

HERB RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See VEGETABLE, HERBS & FRUITS GENERAL RULES 2. JUDGING CRITERIA – Herbs will be judged using the same general criteria used for vegetables. 3. EXHIBIT GUIDELINES – Those grown mainly for their seed such as dill and caraway, should be exhibited on a plate. Those grown for their

leaves such as basil, parsley, etc. should be exhibited in a glass container of water. Potted herb plants will be disqualified and will not be judged.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 773 HERBS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

Number to Exhibit

Number to Exhibit

CLASS 260 Basil 5 CLASS 265 Parsley 5 CLASS 261 Dill (dry) 5 CLASS 266 Sage 5 CLASS 262 Garlic (bulbs) 5 CLASS 267 Thyme 5 CLASS 263 Mint 5 CLASS 268 Any Other Herb 5 CLASS 264 Oregano 5 (do not duplicate entries in

classes 260-267)

CLASS 269 4-H Herb Garden - Display of 5 different herbs. Displayed in a box or other holder not more than 18" in any dimension. Each herb in the collection should be exhibited with the number specified for classes 260-268. Do not duplicate entries in classes 260-268 with any in the group collection.

FRUIT RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See VEGETABLE, HERBS & FRUITS GENERAL RULES 2. JUDGING CRITERIA – Fruits will be judged using the same general criteria used for vegetables. Fruit will be judged for the stage of maturity

normal for that season and growing location. Emphasis will be placed on how well fruit approaches market quality.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 773 FRUITS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

Number to Exhibit

Number to Exhibit

CLASS 280 Strawberries 1 pint CLASS 285 Other Small Fruit or Berries 1 pint CLASS 281 Grapes 2 bunches (do not duplicate entries in CLASS 282 Apples 5 classes 280-284) CLASS 283 Pears 5 CLASS 286 Other Fruits or Nuts 5 CLASS 284 Wild Plums 1 pint (do not duplicate entries in (classes 280-284)

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 773 NOTEBOOKS & POSTERS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 290 Garden Promotion Poster - Individual poster promoting vegetable or herb gardening, size 14" x 22" either vertical or horizontal

arrangement. Poster may be in any medium: watercolor, ink, crayon, etc. as long as it is not 3-dimensional. Posters using copyrighted material will not be accepted. Entry card must be stapled to the upper righthand corner. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the poster

CLASS 291 Educational Vegetable and/or Herb Garden Poster - Prepare a poster no larger than 14" x 22" x 2" (3-dimensional if needed) either vertical or horizontal arrangement illustrating a skill or project you have done or learned about in a 4-H vegetable gardening project. One might show a special technique used or equipment incorporated in the garden. Refer to 4-H horticulture project manuals but use your own creativity. Entry card must be stapled to the upper right hand corner. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the poster

CLASS 292 Vegetable and/or Herb Gardening History Interview - Neatly handwritten or typed account of a gardening history interview whose vegetable or herb garden has inspired you. Maximum of 4 pages of text and 2 pages of pictures (include 1 picture of the person you interviewed) of their garden if the individual is still gardening. Protect with a clear report cover or small 3-ring notebook. The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the report.

CLASS 293 Vegetable Seed Display - Each display must include seeds representing the following families: Cucurbit, Brassica (cabbage), Solanaceous nightshade) and Legume (pea) families plus representatives from 5 other families. Group the seeds by family and types. Glue seeds or otherwise fasten clear containers of seeds to a board or poster mat board no larger than 22" x 24". Label each group and each individual vegetable type with the common and scientific names. Use only one variety or cultivar of each vegetable, except for beans where several examples of beans may be shown. Attach a card to the back of the display explaining why and how it is important to know which vegetables are related and site references on where the scientific name information was found. On the back, label with the 4-H’ers name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s). Information on vegetable family members can be obtained from your Extension Office.

CLASS 294 World of Vegetables Notebook - Choose a favorite foreign cuisine and learn what vegetables and/or herbs are common to it (e.g. Mexican, African, Chinese, Italian, etc.). Include a report telling about minimum of 5 vegetables and/or herbs from each country chosen. Include the scientific and common names; pictures of the plants from your garden or seed catalogs; tell how they are grown; and how the foods are used. Also list a source for buying the seed or plants. Favorite recipes using some or all of the vegetables described may be included. Protect in a clear report cover or 3-ring notebook. The 4-H’ers name, age, full address, county and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the report cover or notebook.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 775 SPECIAL GARDEN PROJECT PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Special Garden Project – Educational Exhibit An educational exhibit based on what was learned in this project. Present information

on a poster 14” x 22” either vertical or horizontal arrangement or in a clear plastic report cover. Fresh cut flowers or harvested vegetables should be entered in the appropriate class above. The 4-H exhibitor’s name, age, full address, and county must be on the back of the poster or report cover.

CLASS 2 Special Garden Project – Fresh Cut Flowers or Harvested Vegetables The current years’ Special Garden Project fresh cut flowers or harvested vegetables should be entered in this class. Refer to classes 1-44 for quantity to exhibit if special garden project is a fresh cut flower. Refer to classes 201-252 for quantity to exhibit if special garden project is a vegetable.

GROW A BEAUTIFUL SPACE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – HORTICULTURE EXHIBITS

60

2. LABELING OF EXHIBITS - The 4-H member's name, age, full address, county, and years in the project(s) must be on the back of the notebook, poster, or portfolio.

DEPARTMENT G DIVISION 777 GROW A BEAUTIFUL SPACE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 401 Grow a Beautiful Space Unit 1 Portfolio Notebook – Create and complete ‘Landscape Professionals & Design Principles’ Unit 1

Portfolio. Present portfolio information in a three-ring binder. Give proper credit by listing the sources of photographs/images and information used.

CLASS 402 Establish Landscape Analysis Poster - Take multiple photographs of a landscape that has been established for 10 or more years. Critique the landscape based on each of the design principles (order, unity, rhythm, balance, scale or proportion, and emphasis). Describe the spatial definition of the landscape and what different areas of the landscape “feel like”. Include photos taken to support your critique. Describe what changes need to be made in the landscape to improve its characteristics and sense of space. Display on a poster mat board no larger than 22" x 28".

CLASS 403 Grow a Beautiful Space Unit 2 Portfolio Notebook - Create and complete ‘Landscape Plants & Materials’ Unit 2 Portfolio. Present portfolio information in a three-ring binder. Give proper credit by listing the sources of photographs/images and information used.

CLASS 404 Landscape Renovation Poster - Take multiple photographs of a landscape that doesn’t quite look right because it doesn’t reflect sound design principles. Select a landscape in which you can make at least three design recommendations. Identify how the design principles (order, unity, rhythm, balance, scale or proportion, and emphasis) could be better integrated into the landscape, and how plants or materials with specific features (size, form, color, or texture) could improve the space. Reduce the opaqueness of the images to 50-60 percent and sketch plants, structures, materials, and/or amenities that could improve the overall design over the original images. The poster should include the original image(s) and improved image(s) and include a short explanation of how the landscape design was improved. Display on a poster mat board no larger than 22" x 28".

CLASS 405 Estimating Dreams Poster - Select a dream landscape as if money is not a consideration. Develop a plan drawing of the landscape. Draw landscape to scale. Identify the types of plants, structures, and amenities used in the landscape. Research the cost of the plants and amenities and the installation. Include the general cost of grading (if needed) and labor that could be associated with installation. Create a list, noting the plants that are included in the space. The quantities of plants and the structures, materials, or amenities and their cost should be included. Calculate the final total estimate. The poster should include the scale drawing of the landscape, identification of plants, structures and amenities, and cost and labor. Display on a poster mat board no larger than 22" x 28".

CLASS 406 Site Inventory & Analysis Poster - Make an unscaled drawing of the landscape you inventoried and analyzed. Develop two drawings: a site inventory and a site analysis. The site inventory and site analysis should be communicated through a combination of written notes, graphics symbols and photographs. Display on a poster mat board no larger than 22" x 28".

CLASS 407 Community Landscape Poster - Identify a local community space (park, nursing home, school, county fairgrounds, etc.) that needs some landscape improvements. Work through the design process and develop a detailed plan of your improvements to the space. The plan should include design principles, functional and aesthetic factors, list of plants and materials and their costs, budget for materials, labor you have available for the project, and a timeline. Take photographs of the area and draw over the photos to illustrate your final ideas. Include photographs of the finished landscape if project ideas were carried out. Display on a poster mat board no larger than 22" x 28".

CLASS 408 Renovate the Outdoors Portfolio - Select a space that you would like to redesign. The space can be at your home, a family member’s or friend’s house, or somewhere in your community. Develop a scaled base map of the site and locate the existing plants and structures in the landscape. Take photographs of the landscape. Evaluate the physical properties of the site and conduct an interview with the people who live there or use the space. Think about how you would change the space and develop a plan that would implement design elements into the space. Create different drawings that will move you through the design process. You will draw concept diagrams, form compositions, preliminary drawings, and the final design. Once the final design drawing is complete, use overlays on the original photographs to show how the landscape will look compared to how it looked in the photo you originally took of the landscape. Place photographs, interview notes, concept and program statements and drawings in a portfolio.

SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY (AEROSPACE, COMPUTERS, ELECTRICITY, LEGOs, ROBOTICS, GEOSPATIAL, WIND ENERGY,

WOODWORKING, WELDING, ATV & SMALL ENGINES, & VETERINARY SCIENCE)

GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. ENTRY LIMITS – Each exhibitor is limited to one entry per class. 3. DISPLAY BOARDS – Several classes require a display board which should be a height of 24” and not to exceed ¼” in thickness. A height of 23

7/8” is acceptable to allow for saw kerf (width) if two 24” boards are cut from one end of a 4’ x 8’ sheet of plywood. Nothing should be mounted within ¾” of the top or bottom of the board.

4. DEMONSTRATION BOARDS – Fabricated boards such as plywood, composition board, or particle-type lumber may be used for demonstration displays. Demonstration boards should be sanded and finished to improve their appearance. The finish on a demonstration board will be judged as a woodworking exhibit. Demonstration boards should include an overall title for the display, plus other necessary labeling.

5. REPORTS – All reports should be clearly written or typed and enclosed in a clear, plastic cover. The reports should be attached securely to the display.

AEROSPACE AEROSPACE RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. ROCKET MOUNTING – Rockets must be supported substantially to protect the rocket from breakage. Rockets are to be mounted on a base that

has dimensions equal or less than 12” x 12” and the base should be ¾” thick. No metal bases. IF the rocket fins extend beyond the edges of the required base (12” x 12”, then construct a base that is large enough to protect the fins. The base size is dictated by the size of the rocket fins. The rockets must be mounted vertically. Please do not attach sideboards or back drops to the displays. In addition, a used engine or length of dowel pin is to be glued and/or screwed into the board and extended up into the rocket’s engine mount to give it added stability.

3. PREPARATION – Rockets must be equipped as prepared for launching, with wadding and parachute or other recovery system. 4. DISQUALIFICATION – Rockets entered with live engines, wrong base size or sideboards will be disqualified. Complete factory assembled rockets

will not be accepted at the State Fair. 5. REPORTS – A report, protected in a clear plastic cover, must include: 1) rocket specification, 2) a flight record for each launching (weather,

distance, flight height), 3) number of launchings, and 4) flight pictures. The flight record should describe engine used, what the rocket did in flight,

61

and recovery success. Points will not be deducted for launching, flight, or recovery failures described. This includes any damage that may show on the rocket.

6. JUDGING – Judging is based upon display appearance, rocket appearance, workmanship, design or capabilities for flight, and number of times launched. Three launches are required to earn the 25 launch points given on the score sheets. Only actual launches count, misfires will not count towards one of the three required launches.

7. SELF DESIGNED ROCKETS – For self-designed rockets only, please include a digital recorded copy of one flight. In the documentation please include a description of stability testing before the rocket was flown.

8. LEVELS – 4-H rocket project levels are not intended to correspond to the National Association of Rocketry model rocket difficulty ratings or levels. Exhibitors may only enter exhibits at one level of competition.

9. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the aerospace division. 10. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 850 AEROSPACE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Level 1 Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Pre-Flight project. CLASS 1 Level 2 Rocket – Any skill level 2 rocket with wooden fins painted by hand or air brush. CLASS 2 Level 2 Display – Display exemplifying one to the principles learned in the Lift-Off project. Examples include: display of rocket parts

and purpose, interview of someone in the aerospace field, or kite terminology. Display can be any size up to 28” x 22”. CLASS 3 Level 2 Rocket – Any skill level 2 rocket with wooden fins painted using commercial application (example: commercial spray paint). CLASS 4 Level 3 Rocket – Any skill level 3 rocket with wooden fins painted by hand or air brush. CLASS 5 Level 3 Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Reaching New Heights project. Examples include:

airplane instrumentation, kite flying, or radio-controlled planes. Display can be any size up to 28” x 22” CLASS 6 Level 3 Rocket – Any skill level 3 rocket with wooden fins painted using commercial application (example: commercial spray paint). CLASS 7 Level 4 Rocket – Any skill level 4 rocket with wooden fins or any self-designed rocket. CLASS 8 Level 4 Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Pilot in Command project. Examples include: flying

lessons, or careers in aerospace. Display can be up to 28” x 22 CLASS 20 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in the field of aerospace and research that career. Interviews can either be

written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced, 12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

COMPUTERS COMPUTER RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the computer division. 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 860 COMPUTERS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

COMPUTER MYSTERIES UNIT 1 CLASS 901 Computer Hardware Poster – Should exemplify something learned about computer hardware in Computer Mysteries Unit 1.

Poster can be any size up to 28” x 22”. CLASS 902 Computer Software Poster – Should exemplify something learned about computer software in Computer Mysteries Unit 1.

Poster can be any size up to 28” x 22”.

COMPUTER MYSTERIES UNIT 2 CLASS 1 Computer Application Demonstration – 4-H exhibitor demonstrates how to accomplish a test using a computer application

software such as a spreadsheet, database, publishing, graphic design, accounting or precision farming program. The exhibit consists of a notebook (8.5” x 11”) which should include: 1. A cover page; 2. Detailed report describing: a. the task to be completed, b. the computer application software needed to complete the task, c. specific features of the computer application software necessary for completing the task, and d. other tasks that can be accomplished using the computer application software; 3. Print out of your project. (Examples: design a logo for your school; enhance a digital image for a newspaper story; manage a checking account; create a poster to publicize an event; or to design scrapbook pages, or other).

CLASS 2 Produce a Computer Slideshow Presentation – Using presentation software like Microsoft PowerPoint. The 4-H exhibitor develops a slideshow about a topic related to youth. The slideshow should include a minimum of 10 slides and nor more than 25. Incorporate appropriate slide layouts, graphics, and animations. Each slide should include notes for a presenter. The exhibit includes a copy of the presentation saved to a CD-ROM along with a printout of the notes pages in a clear plastic cover. Slide presentation should relate to one topic.

COMPUTER MYSTERIES UNIT 3 CLASS 4 Produce an Audio/Video Computer Presentation – Using presentation software a 4-H exhibitor designs a multimedia computer

presentation on one topic related to youth. The presentation should be at least two minutes in length and no more than five minutes in length, appropriate graphics, sound and either a video clip, animation or voice over and/or original video clip. The presentation must be able to be played and viewed on a PC using Windows Media Player, Real Player, iTunes, or QuickTime.

CLASS 5 How to STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering and Math) Presentation – Youth design a fully automated two to five minute 4-H “how to” video. Submissions should incorporate a picture or video of the 4-H member, as well as their name (first name only), age (as of January 1st of the current year), years in 4-H, and their personal interests or hobbies. Videos should be designed for web viewing. Any of the following formats will be accepted: .mpeg, .rm, .wmv, .mp4, .ov, .ppt, or .avi.

CLASS 6 Create a Web Site/Blog or App – Design a simple web site/blog or app for providing information about a topic related to youth using either software programs such as an HTML editor like Microsoft’s FrontPage or Macromedia’s Dreamweaver, and image editor like IrfanView or GIMP OR online using a WIKI such as Google Sites. If the web site, blog, or app isn’t live include all files comprising the web site on a CD-ROM in a plastic case along with the explanation of why the site was created. If developed using a WIKI or other online tool include a link to the website in the explanation of why the site was created.

CLASS 7 3D Printing Unique Item – 3D printing uses plastic or other materials to build a three-dimensional object from a digital design. Youth may use original designs or someone else’s they have re-designed in a unique way. Exhibits will be judged based on the complexity of the design and shape. 3D UNIQUE OBJECT: 3D objects printed for their own sake. May be an art design, tool, or other object. 3D printing will include a notebook with the following: Software used to create 3D design; Design or, if using a re-design, the original design and the youth’s design with changes; and Orientation on how the object was printed.

62

CLASS 8 3D Printing Prototypes - 3D printing uses plastic or other materials to build a three-dimensional object from a digital design. Youth may use original designs or someone else’s they have re-designed in a unique way. Exhibits will be judged based on the complexity of the design and shape. 3D objects printed as part of the design process for robot or other engineering project or cookie cutter, be creative. Must include statement of what design question the prototype was supposed to answer and what was learned from the prototype. 3D printing will include a notebook with the following: Software used to create 3D design; Design or, if using a re-design, the original design and the youth’s design with changes; and Orientation on how the object was printed.

CLASS 901 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in the field of computers and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced, 12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three to five minutes in length.

ELECTRICITY ELECTRICITY RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. TOP EXHIBITS - A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the electricity division. 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 870 ELECTRICITY PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

Electricity – Magic of Electricity – Unit 1 CLASS 901 Bright Lights – Create your own flashlight using items found from around your house. Flashlights should be made out of items

that could be recycled or reused. No kits allowed. CLASS 902 Control the Flow – Make a switch. Use the following items: D cell battery, battery holder, insulated wire, 2 or 2.5 volt light bulb,

bulb holder, paper clip, cardboard, and two brass paper fasteners to create a circuit you can open and close. CLASS 903 Conducting Things – Make a circuit with a switch and a light bulb that can be used to test different household items for their

ability to act as an insulator or conductor. You must find five items that are conductors and five items that are insulators. Create a table that illustrates your results.

CLASS 904 Is There a Fork in the Road – Using the following items to construct one parallel and one series circuit. Items: D cell battery, battery holder, insulated wire, bulb holder, and a 1.2 or 1.5 volt light bulb.

CLASS 905 Electrical Poster – Poster should exemplify one of the lessons learned in the Magic of Electricity project. Posters can be any size up to 28” x 22”.

Electricity – Investigating Electricity – Unit 2 CLASS 906 Case of the Switching Circuit – Use the following items: two D cell batteries, two battery holders, light bulb, bulb holder, a 3” x

6” piece of cardboard, six brass paper fasteners, and approximately 2 feet of 24 gauge insulated wire to build a three way switch. Write a short essay or create a poster that illustrates how three-way switches function.

CLASS 907 Rocket Launcher – Construct a rocket launcher out of the following materials: a plastic pencil box that is at least 4” x 8”, single pole switch, normal open push button switch, 40 feet of 18 or 22 gauge stranded wire, 4 alligator clips, 2” x 6” board (6” long), 1/8” diameter metal rod, rosin core solder, soldering iron or gun, wire stripper, small crescent wrench, pliers small Phillips and straight blade screwdrivers, drill 1/8” and ¼” drill bits, rocket engine igniters, additional drill bits matched to holes for two switches. You may successfully build a rocket launcher and light two rocket igniters with your launcher. You DO NOT have to actually fire a rocket off of the launcher. Create a poster using photographs to show the step-by-step process you used to build your launcher.

CLASS 908 Stop the Crime – Build an alarm using the following materials: on-off push button switch, mercury switch, buzzer-vibrating or piezoelectric, 9 volt battery, 9 volt battery holder, 4” x 4” x 1/8” Plexiglas board to mount circuit on, rosin core solder, soldering iron or gun, 2 feet of 22 gauge wire, wire strippers, hot glue sticks, hot glue gun, and plastic box with lid to mount your alarm circuit on. Create a poster using photographs to show the step-by-step process you used to build your alarm.

CLASS 909 Electrical Poster – Poster should exemplify one of the lessons learned in the Investigating Electricity project. Posters can be any size up to 28” x 22”.

Electricity – Wired for Power – Unit 3 CLASS 1 Electrical Tool/Supply Kit – Create an electrical supply kit to be used for basic electrical repair around the house. Include a brief

description of each item and its use. Container should be appropriate to hold items. CLASS 2 Lighting Comparison – Display studying the efficiency of various lighting (incandescent, fluorescent, halogen, Light Emitting

Diodes (LED), etc.) Exhibit could be a poster display or actual item. CLASS 3 Electrical Display/Item – Show an application of one of the concepts learned in the Wired for Power project. Examples include: re-

wiring or building a lamp, re-wiring or making a heavy-duty extension cord or developing an electrical diagram of a house. Exhibit could be a poster display or an actual item.

CLASS 4 Poster – Poster should exemplify one of the lessons learned in the Wired for Power project. Posters can be any size up to 28” x 22”.

Electricity – Entering Electronics – Unit 4 CLASS 5 Electrical/Electronic Part Identification – Display different parts used for electrical/electronic work. Exhibit should show the part

(either picture or actual item) and give a brief description, including symbol of each part and its function. Display should include a minimum of 10 different parts.

CLASS 6 Electronic Display – Show an application of one of the concepts learned in the Entering Electronics project. Examples include: components of an electronics device (refer to page 35 of the project manual).

CLASS 7 Electronic Project – Exhibit an electronic item designed by the 4-H exhibitor or from a manufactured kit that shows the electronic expertise of the 4-Her. Examples include: a radio, computer, or a volt meter.

CLASS 8 Poster – Poster should exemplify one of the lessons learned in the Entering Electronics project. Posters can be any size up to 28” x 22”.

CLASS 10 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in the field of electricity and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced,12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

LEGO BUILDING LEGO BUILDING RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. LABELING – Each exhibit must have name and age attached. 3. EXHIBITS – The exhibits in Lego Building are educational exhibits.

63

LEGO BUILDING EXHIBIT (MODEL) – An exhibit that is made from a set design of plans or a model that includes directions on how to construct. LEGO BUILDING EXHIBIT (ORIGINAL) – An exhibit that is original creation of the exhibitor and not is made from a set design of plans or a model.

4. EXHIBITING – All Lego exhibits must be displayed on a board so they may be moved easily. 5. SUPPORTING INFORMATION – All exhibits must include a half page describing what steps were taken to create the entry and what was learned

in the process of creation. All exhibits lacking supporting information will be drop a ribbon placing. 6. DISCLAIMER – The Johnson County 4-H program and Extension Office will try to exhibit the models so they are safe but will not be responsible for

lost items. 7. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Lego building division.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 881 LEGO BUILDING PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Lego Model (500 pieces or less) CLASS 902 Lego Model (501 pieces or more) CLASS 903 Lego Original (500 pieces or less) CLASS 904 Lego Original (501 pieces or more)

ROBOTICS ROBOTICS RULES 8. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 9. ENROLLMENT – Youth enrolled in Robotics Explorer, Robotics Probe or GEAR TECH 21 may exhibit in any class within this division. 10. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the robotics division. 11. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 861 ROBOTICS PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Robotics Poster – Create a poster (14” x 22”) communicating a robotics theme such as “Robot or Not”, “Pseudo Code”, “Real

World Robots”, “Careers in Robots” or “Autonomous Robotics”, “Precision Agriculture” or a robotic topic of interest to the 4-H exhibitor.

CLASS 2 Robotics Notebook – Explore a robotics topic in-depth and present your findings in a notebook. Documentation should include any designs, research, notes, pseudo code, data tables or other evidence of the 4-H’ers learning experience. The notebook should contain at least three pages. Topics could include a programming challenge, a programming skill, calibration, sensor exploration, or any of the topics suggested in Class 1 (see above).

CLASS 3 Robotics Video – This class should be displayed in a notebook. The notebook should include a video clip on a CD/DVD that demonstrates the robot performing the programmed function. Include your pseudo code and screenshots of the actual code with a written description of the icon/command functions.

CLASS 4 Robotics Career Interview - Interview someone who is working in the field of robotics and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced,12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

CLASS 5 Robotics Sensor Notebook – Write pseudo code which includes at least one sensor activity. Include the code written and explain the code function.

CLASS 6 Build a Robot (may use kit) – Include a robot and notebook including the pseudo codes for at least one program you have written for the robot, the robots purpose, and any challenges or changes you would make in the robot design or programming.

CLASS 7 Kit Labeled Robot (cannot be programmed) – This class is intended for explorations of robotic components such as arms or vehicles OR educational kits marketed as robots that do not have the ability to be programmed to “sense, plan, and act.” The exhibit should include a project the youth has constructed, a description of what it does and an explanation of how it is similar to and different from a robot.

CLASS 901 Other Exhibit – Other exhibit demonstrating the knowledge gained in this project.

GEOSPATIAL GEOSPATIAL RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. ENROLLMENT – Youth enrolled in Geospatial or GEAR TECH 21 may exhibit in any class within this division. 3. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the geospatial division. 4. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 880 GEOSPATIAL PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Poster – Create a poster (not to exceed 14” x 22”) communicating a GPS theme such as: how GPS or GIS works, careers that use

GPS or GIS, how to use GPS, what is GIS, GPS or GIS in agriculture, precision agriculture, or a geospatial topic of interest. CLASS 2 4-H Favorite Places or Historical Site Poster – The 4-H exhibitor identifies a favorite place or historical site (including grave

sites) in Nebraska. Exhibit should include latitude and longitude, digital picture, and local area map. Posters size should not exceed 14” x 22”.

CLASS 3 GPS Notebook – Keep a log of at least five places visited using a GPS enabled device. For each site, record the latitude, longitude, and elevation. Also include a description of the site, a paragraph explaining what was interesting about the site or finding it. Photos of each site and/or cache are optional but encouraged.

CLASS 4 Geocache – Assemble a themed geocache. Each geocache should be a watertight container. It should include a logbook and pencil for finders to log their visits and may include small trinkets, geocoins, etc. for the finders to trade. Documentation should include a title, teaser description, and geographic coordinates of intended placement. Register the site at http://geocaching.com, include a print out of its registry. The entry may include a photograph of the cache in its intended hiding place.

CLASS 5 Agricultural Precision Mapping – 4-Hers will assemble a notebook that will include a minimum of 2 digital copies of various data layers that can be used in precision agriculture to identify spatial patterns and/or correlations (printed copies of websites were applications can be purchased is acceptable) A report of how the analysis of the various data will be used to make a management decision.

CLASS 7 4-H History Map – Preserve 4-H History: Nominate a Point of Interest for the 4-H History Map Project include copy of submitted form in folder or notebook. To nominate a site for the 4-H history map please go to http://arcg.is/1bvGogV. For more information

64

about 4-H history go to http://www.4-hhistorypreservation.com/History_Map/ For a step by step video on nominating a point, please go to this link: http://tinyurl.com/nominate4h. Write a brief description of historical significance of 4-H place or person. (a minimum of one paragraph)

CLASS 10 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in a geospatial field and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced,12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

POWER OF WIND POWER OF WIND RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the Power of Wind division. 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 900 POWER OF WIND PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

CLASS 1 Engineering Notebook – Your engineering notebook may include sketches of designs, notes of engineering questions you have, or answers to questions posed within the project manual, pictures as your complete exercises within this project, or big ideas you have while participating in this project. The notebook submitted in this class should be a working engineering notebook, NOT a scrapbook. Please include your name, county, and age on the front cover.

CLASS 2 Wind Poster – Poster should exemplify one of the lessons learned in the Power of Wind project. Posters can be any size up to 14” x 22”.

CLASS 3 Mini Turbine Blade Energy Display – Develop a pinwheel display that demonstrates the working power of wind. Follow guidelines on pages 18 and 19 of the project manual. Display should include a notebook description of the effectiveness of at least three different designs or materials. Please do not include pennies with your display.

CLASS 4 Wind Art or Literature Written Piece – Item should illustrate or represent wind turbines, wind power, or something from the power of wind curriculum (example: a pinwheel or item may be original story or poem written by the exhibitor about wind).

CLASS 5 Wind as Energy Display – Items should be the original design of the 4-H exhibitor. Include the item, or a picture if the item is in excess of 6’ tall or 2’ x2’. Include a notebook of why the item was designed and how it harnesses the power of the wind.

CLASS 6 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in the field of wind and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced,12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

WOODWORKING WOODWORKING RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. ENTRY LIMITS – 4-H members are allowed entries in only ONE UNIT of competition. 4-H members may only enter ONE EXHIBIT per class. 3. EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS – ALL articles exhibited MUST include a plan stating dimensions and other critical instructions a builder would need

to know to construct the project. Plans may include narrative instructions in addition to the dimension drawings. Part of the score depends on how well the project matches the plans. If plans are modified, the changes from the original need to be noted on the plans. All plans used for making the article must be securely attached to the project in a clear plastic cover. Any exhibits not having the required information will be lowered a ribbon placing.

4. RECYCLED WOODWORKING DISPLAY - Exhibit must include the woodworking plan and a minimum one-page report of how the engineering design process was used to develop the woodworking plan.

Engineering Design Process 1) State the problem (Why did you need this item?) 2) Generate possible solutions (How have others solved the problem? What other alternatives or designs were considered?) 3) Select a solution (How does your solution compare on the basis of cost, availability, and functionality?) 4) Build the item (What was your woodworking plan, and what processes did you use to build your item?) 5) Reason for article finish (What type of finish? How did you finish? Why did you choose this finish?) 6) Evaluate (How does your item solve the original need?) 7) Present results (How would you do this better next time?)

5. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the woodworking division. 6. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 911 WOODWORKING PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00

WOODWORKING – UNIT 1 CLASS 910 Woodworking Article – Items made using skills learned in the Measuring Up manual (examples include: recipe holder, stilts, or

other skill appropriate item). Items MUST be entered with construction plans (see above). CLASS 920 Woodworking Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Measuring Up project. CLASS 930 Recycled Woodworking Article - Article made from recycled, reclaimed or composite wood. Article must be sanded and sealed

and utilize one or more woodworking techniques learned in the Measuring Up project. Exhibit must include the woodworking plan and a minimum one-page report of how the engineering design process was used to develop the woodworking plan.

CLASS 940 Other Item – Other item displaying the knowledge gained in this project. CLASS

WOODWORKING – UNIT 2 CLASS 950 Woodworking Article – Items made using skills learned in the Making the Cut manual (examples include: birdhouse, footstool,

napkin or letter holder, or other skill appropriate item). Items MUST be entered with construction plans (see above). CLASS 960 Woodworking Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Making the Cut project. CLASS 970 Recycled Woodworking Article - Article made from recycled, reclaimed or composite wood. Article must be sanded and sealed

and utilize one or more woodworking techniques learned in the Making the Cut project. Exhibit must include the woodworking plan and a minimum one-page report of how the engineering design process was used to develop the woodworking plan.

CLASS 980 Other Item – Other item displaying the knowledge gained in this project.

WOODWORKING – UNIT 3

65

CLASS 1 Woodworking Article – Items made using either joints, hinges, dowels, or a dado joining and other skills learned in the Nailing It Together manual (examples include: bookcase, coffee table, end table, or other skill appropriate item). Items are required to be appropriately finished. Items MUST be entered with construction plans (see above).

CLASS 2 Woodworking Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Nailing it Together project (examples include: measuring angles, wood lamination, and joint types).

CLASS 3 Recycled Woodworking Article - Article made from recycled, reclaimed or composite wood. Article must be appropriately finished and/or sealed and utilize one or more woodworking techniques from page 2 of the Unit 3 manual. Exhibit must include the woodworking plan and a minimum one-page report of how the engineering design process was used to develop the woodworking plan.

WOODWORKING – UNIT 4 CLASS 4 Woodworking Article – Items made using skills learned in the Finishing Up manual (examples include: dovetailing, making a pen

using lathe, overlays using a router, or other skill appropriate item). Item is required to be appropriately finished. Items MUST be entered with construction plans (see above).

CLASS 5 Woodworking Display – Display exemplifying one of the principles learned in the Finishing Up project (examples include: career opportunities, types of finishes, or dovetailing).

CLASS 6 Recycled Woodworking Article - Article made from recycled, reclaimed or composite wood. Article must be appropriately finished and/or sealed; and utilize one or more woodworking techniques from page 2 of the Unit 4 manual. Exhibit must include the woodworking plan and a minimum one-page report of how the design and engineering process was used to develop the woodworking plan.

CLASS 10 Careers Interview – Interview someone who is working in the field of woodworking and research that career. Interviews can either be written or in a multimedia format (CD/DVD). Written interviews should be in a notebook. Written reports should be three to five pages, double-spaced, 12-point font, and 1” margins. Multimedia reports should be between three and five minutes in length.

WELDING WELDING RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. EXHIBIT REQUIREMENTS – All welds exhibited in Class 1 or 2 must be mounted on a 12” high x 15” long display board of thickness not to

exceed 3/8”. Attach each weld on a wire loop hinge or equivalent, so the judge can look at the bottom side of the weld when necessary. Each weld should be labeled with the following information: 1. Type of welding process (stick, MIG, TIG, oxy-acetylene, etc.), 2. Kind of weld, 3. Weld setter, 4. Electrode/wire/rod size, and 5. Electrode/wire/rod ID numbers. Attach a wire to display board so it can be hung like a picture frame.

3. TIPS & SUGGESTIONS – CLASS 1 • All welds should be made with the same electrode/wire/rod size and number. • Welds should be made only on one side of the medal so penetration can be judged. • Welds should be cleaned with chipping hammer and wire brush. Apply a coat of light oil (penetrating oil) to the metal to prevent rusting.

Wipe off excess oil. • It is suggested that all welds be on the same size thickness of metal. These pieces, referred to as coupons, should be 1.5” to 2” wide and

3.5” to 4” long. A good way to get this size is to buy new cold rolled strap iron and cut to length. The extra wide width is needed to provide enough metal to absorb heat from the welding process and prevent the coupons from becoming too hot before the beat is completed. Narrower coupons will become very hot, making an average welder setting too cold at the bead start, just about right in the middle, and too hot at the end. The correct way to weld narrow strips is to make short beads and allow time to cool, however this project requires a full-length bead.

• Stick welding: Suggested coupon thickness ¼” if using 1/8” rod. Suggested rod – AC and DC straight or reverse polarity – first E-7014, second E-6013.

• MIG Welding: Suggested coupon thickness ¼” if using .035 wire and 1/8” if using .023 wire. • Oxy-Acetylene: Suggested coupon thickness 1/8”, suggested rod 1/8” mild steel rod. CLASS 2 • It is suggested that all welds be on same size and thickness of metal. These pieces are referred to as coupons. The welds can be on one

coupon that is about 4” x 4” or on individual coupons that are about 2” x 4” and ¼” thick. Suggested rods for this class of position welds for AC and DC straight or reverse polarity is, first E-6013, second E-7014 and E-6010 for DC reverse polarity only.

• Welds should be cleaned with a chipping hammer and wire brush. Apply a coat of light oil (penetrating oil) to the metal to prevent rusting. Wipe off excess oil.

CLASS 3 & 4 • All welds should be cleaned and protected from rust with paint or light oil. Plans are to be complete enough that if they were given to a

welding shop the item could be made without further instruction. Bill of materials should include a cost for all items used including steel, electrodes, paint, wheels, etc.

4. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the welding division. 5. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 920 WELDING PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Welding Joints – A display of one butt, one lap, and one filet weld. CLASS 2 Position Welds – A display showing three beads welded in the vertical down, horizontal, and overhead positions. CLASS 3 Welding Article – Any shop article where welding is used in the construction. All plans and bill of materials must be attached to the

article. Protect plans with a plastic cover. CLASS 4 Welding Furniture - Any furniture with 75% welding is used in the construction. 60% of item must be completed by 4-Her and notes

regarding laser welding or machine welding must be included. All plans, plan alternations, dimensions and a bill for materials must be attached to the article. Protect plans with a cover. If the project is designed to be outside it is required to have appropriate outdoor finish.

CLASS 5 Plasma Cutter/Welder Design – Plasma cutters/welders allow for detailed design(s) to be cut into metal. 4-Her will create a notebook describing the design process to create the “artwork” cut into the metal. In the notebook include:

1. A photo (front and back) of the finished project. Also include detailed photographs of the project to all judges to examine cuts.

66

2. Instructions on how the design was created, this allows for replication of the project. 3. Lessons learned or improvements to the project.

CLASS 910 Other Item – Other item displaying the knowledge gained in this project.

ATV & SMALL ENGINE ATV & SMALL ENGINES RULES 1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 2. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the ATV & Small Engines division. 3. MANUALS – Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 890 ATV & SMALL ENGINES PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 910 ATV Safety Poster – Poster displaying photos of yourself demonstrating safety measures necessary for ATV operation. Posters

are not to exceed 14” x 22”. CLASS 920 ATV Anatomy Poster – Poster displaying ATV anatomy (parts). Posters are not to exceed 14” x 22”. CLASS 930 Small Engine Display/Item Unit 1 – Show an application of one of the concepts learned in the Crank It Up manual (examples:

identify the parts of a small engine, safety rules for starting a small engine, small engine repair tool identification). Exhibit may be a poster display or actual item.

CLASS 940 Small Engine Display/Item Unit 2 - Show an application of one of the concepts learned in the Warm It Up manual (examples: comparison of engine oil types, transmissions or safety related to engines). Exhibit may be a poster display or actual item.

CLASS 950 Other Item – Other item displaying the knowledge gained in this project.

VETERINARY SCIENCE VETERINARY SCIENCE RULES 7. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES – SCIENCE, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY 8. PURPOSE – The purpose of Veterinary Science exhibit is to inform the public about a common health problem of animals or a veterinary

science principle. Do not confuse veterinary science exhibit topics with animal husbandry or production topics. Appropriate topics include, but are not limited to: maintaining health, specific disease information, photographic display of normal and abnormal characteristics of animals, animal health or safety, public health or safety, proper animal management to ensure food safety and quality, or efficient and safe livestock working facilities.

9. EXHIBITS – A Veterinary Science exhibit may consist of a poster or display. The exhibit may represent materials from any of the Veterinary Science project manuals. All reference materials need to be properly cited. Exhibits lacking proper citation will be lowered a ribbon placing. Posters • This exhibit should present the viewer with a design that id simple and direct, unlike a display that usually presents more information. • A poster should not exceed 22” x 28” and may be either vertical or horizontal. Displays • A display may include but is not limited to: a three dimensional exhibit, a scale model, the actual product (example: skeleton; teeth;

samples of leather, fur, or dried skin damaged by disease or parasites) or a notebook. • A display is not a poster. • A display may be mounted on poster board not to exceed 22” x 28” or on ¼” plywood or equivalent that does not exceed 24” high or 32”

wide. 10. PHOTOGRAPHS – If photographs are to be part of the exhibit, remember the public will view them. Make sure that the photographs are in good

taste and not offensive to anyone. Graphic photographs of excessive bleeding, trauma, or painful procedures are not appropriate. For exhibits related to veterinary surgical procedures, aseptic techniques need to be shown (for example: use of drapes, use of sterile procedures, wearing of gloves, and other appropriate veterinary medical practices).

11. REFERENCES – Since these are science displays, all references and information needs to be properly cited. 12. FIRST AID KITS – Because of public safety concerns and risk of theft of first aid kit contents (veterinary drugs/equipment) with perceived

potential drug abuse, NO ANIMAL FIRST AID KITS WILL BE PERMITTED. Animal first aid kits entered will be disqualified and not exhibited. 13. TOP EXHIBIT – A top exhibit will be selected from those exhibits receiving purple ribbons in the veterinary science division. 14. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson

County.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISON 840 VETERINARY SCIENCE PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 1 Veterinary Science Large Animal Poster or Display CLASS 2 Veterinary Science Small Animal/Pet Poster or Display CLASS 910 Other Poster or Display

PROJECT FLOP GENERAL RULES – PROJECT FLOP

1. GENERAL RULES – See GENERAL RULES 2. REQUIREMENTS – Exhibit an item illustrating a preparation problem. Flop may be the result of an intentional or accidental mistake. On a sheet of

8 ½” x 11” paper explain the preparation problem(s) experienced and how it could be overcome. The written explanation will be the basis for judging the exhibit. Also, indicate on your written explanation what Department, Division, and Class the item would have been entered in if problems were not encountered in its preparation.

DEPARTMENT H DIVISION 999 PROJECT FLOP PREMIUM Purple $2.50 Blue $2.00 Red $1.50 White $1.00 CLASS 901 Project Flop

67

CLOVER KIDS GENERAL RULES – CLOVER KIDS 1. CLOVER KID PROGRAM – The Clover Kid Program is a non-competitive program designed for youth ages 5 to 7 years of age (December 31st of

the preceding year). All Clover Kid activities will be non-competitive. 2. ENROLLMENT – Clover Kid exhibitors must be enrolled by May 1 in the Clover Kid program. 3. PRE-ENTRY –

Speech Contest – Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid public speaking division at the county 4-H Communication Contests must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. Presentation Contest - Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid Show & Tell division at the county 4-H Communication Contests must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. Music Contest - Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid division at the Johnson County 4-H Music Contest must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and narration sheet and submitting them to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. Favorite Food Revue – Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid division at the Johnson County 4-H Favorite Food Revue must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and submitting it to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. Fashion Show - Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid division at the Johnson County 4-H Fashion Show must pre-enter by completing the appropriate entry form and narration sheet and submitting them to the Johnson County Extension Office by closing on the date designated by the Extension Office. Pet Show - Clover Kids wanting to participate in the Clover Kid Pet Show at the county fair must submit a Clover Kid animal identification form to the Extension Office by closing on June 15 and submit a Clover Kid Pet Show entry form to the Extension Office by closing on July 15.

4. EXHIBIT ENTRY – All Clover Kid static exhibits (including food) will be entered with other static exhibits Tuesday prior to the opening of the Johnson County Fair. Clover Kid exhibitors will be required to complete entry tags and a Johnson County Static Exhibit Summary Sheet prior to entering exhibits.

5. ENTRY LIMIT – A Clover Kid exhibitor may have a maximum of: • 1 Speech Contest entry • 1 Presentation Contest entry • 1 Clover Kid Music Contest entry • 1 Favorite Food Revue entry • 1 Clover Kid Fashion Show entry • 2 Clover Kid Pet Show entries • 10 static exhibit entries

6. RECOGNITION - Clover Kid exhibitors will receive participation ribbons and a $1.00 premium for each class they enter. 7. CLOVER KID ANIMAL PROJECTS - Animal projects are brought the day of the Clover Kid Pet Show and taken home after the show. Large

animals may be shown if they meet the following size requirements. Bucket Calves: the maximum weight limit for bucket calves shown in the Clover Kid Pet Show is 250 pounds. Ponies: the maximum height limit for ponies shown in the Clover Kid Pet Show is 40 inches. Adults must consider the safety of the child and others, in addition to the safety of the animal when allowing a child of this age to handle animals. Johnson County UNL Extension staff and/or Overall Livestock Superintendent reserve the right to dismiss animals that pose a safety threat.

8. MANUALS - Printed materials are available from the Johnson County Extension Office for all currently enrolled 4-H members in Johnson County. • Aerospace: Aerospace 1: Pre-Flight (NATL4H 06842), Rockets Away (4H503) • Career Exploration: LEAP Into Careers (4H2000) • Citizenship: Family Celebrations from Around the World (4H1485) • Foods & Nutrition: Making Foods for Me (4H1650) • Home Environment: A Space for Me Activity Manual (4H200) • Outdoor Discovery: Just Outside the Door: Member’s Guide (4H1461) • Leader: Aerospace Helper’s Guide (NATL4H 06846), Aerospace [CD] (NATL4H 07605), Making Foods for Me - Helper’s Guide (4H1660), A

Space for Me: Leader’s Guide (4H201), Just Outside the Door: Leader Guide (4H460).

DEPARTMENT Z DIVISION 100 CLOVER KIDS PRE-FAIR CONTESTS

CLASS 901 Speech Contest CLASS 902 Presentation Contest CLASS 903 Music Contest CLASS 904 Favorite Food Revue CLASS 905 Fashion Show

COUNTY FAIR SHOWS CLASS 906 Clover Kid Pet Show

COUNTY FAIR STATIC EXHIBITS CLASS 910 Aerospace Exhibit Examples: model airplane or rocket, poster explaining the parts of a

flying machine, etc.

CLASS 910 Bicycle Adventures Exhibit Examples: poster promoting the use of helmets, exhibit demonstrating proper hand signals, etc.

CLASS 910 Career Exploration Examples: Poster of what you want to be when you grow up, etc.

CLASS 910 Create Your Corner Exhibit Examples: decorative storage box or container, mobile, collage, banner, sun catcher, etc.

68

CLASS 910 Decorate Your Duds Exhibit Examples: decorated t-shirt, handmade accessory, etc.

CLASS 910 Exploring Farm Animals Exhibit Examples: animal sculpture, etc.

CLASS 910 Exploring Your Body Exhibit Examples: first aid kit, healthy habits poster, My Plate diagram, etc.

CLASS 910 Family Celebrations from Around the World Exhibit Examples: holiday decoration, poster describing a family tradition, etc.

CLASS 910 Just Outside the Door Exhibit Examples: bird feeder, container with flowers, garden decoration, insect model, etc.

CLASS 910 Road to Good Cooking Exhibit Examples: table setting poster, cookies, trail mix, etc.

CLASS 910 Theater Arts Exhibit Examples: homemade puppet, picture story, poster created for an event, etc.

69

2018 Johnson County Fair 4-H Schedule Saturday August 11 10:00 AM - Noon Food Exhibit Entry Day Johnson County 4-H Bldg. Sunday August 12 2:00 PM County Fair Clean Up Tuesday August 14 5:00 – 7:00 PM Static Exhibit Entry Night Johnson County 4-H Bldg. Thursday August 16 8:00 - 10:00 AM Swine Entry 10:00 AM - Noon Sheep & Goat Entry 3:00 – 5:00 PM Poultry & Rabbit Entry 5:30 -8:30 PM Cattle Entry (Beef, Dairy, Bucket Calf) 7:00 - 10:00 PM Horse Entry Friday August 17 8:00 AM Swine Show 7:00 - 8:00AM Horse Entry 8:00 AM Horse Show 11:30 AM Poultry & Rabbit Show – Live Placing 1:00 PM Fitting Contest

3:30 PM Sheep Show 5:30 PM Clover Kid Pet Show

Saturday August 18 8:00 AM Goat Show 11:00 AM Bucket Calf Show 11:30 AM Dairy Cattle Show 12:30 PM Beef Cattle Show Sunday August 19 10:00 AM Horse Show (Trail & Speed Classes)

12:00 PM Poultry Show - Showmanship 12:00 PM Rabbit Show - Showmanship 7:00 PM Livestock Premium Sale